七、六随念论释显示巴利原文
7. Chaanussatiniddesavaṇṇanā
一、佛随念论释显示巴利原文
1. Buddhānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
123 123.“不净之后”指在不净业处之后。“在诸随念中”指在随念业处当中。为了显示“随念即是反复忆念”这一含义,说“由于反复生起”;为了显示此处“念”字并非因与“随”字结合而表达其他含义,故说“念本身就是随念”。由此表明,此处的“随”字并不像“获得”等词中的“upa”那样无意义,也不像“了知、遍知”等词中的“saṃ”等那样表示其他含义。又通过“由于只在应生起之处生起”这句话,说明了随念与所应随念之处的相称性。为了显示能生起者的相称性,故说“对善男子是相称的”,即对依信出家的善男子是相称的。所谓相称性,正是基于对应当生起之处的相称性,所以只说了能生起者的相称性,而非两者的相称性。“相称”意为“适合”。“佛”是指基于那些功德而在世尊上施设的“佛陀”这一名称,此处是总括那些功德而说。因此说“这是以佛功德为所缘的念的别名”。“关于”指以之为所缘。“法”包括教法在内的九种出世间法。难道涅槃不是单独作为一种业处来说的吗?虽然会单独说,但由于在法的共通性上,它与道果一起被包含在此处的经文中,因此……显示巴利原文
123.Asubhānantaranti asubhakammaṭṭhānānantaraṃ. Anussatīsūti anussatikammaṭṭhānesu. ‘‘Anu anu sati anussatī’’ti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘punappunaṃ uppajjanato’’ti vatvā na ettha anu-saddayogena sati-saddo atthantaravācakoti dassetuṃ ‘‘satiyeva anussatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena nāyamanu-saddo ‘‘upalabbhatī’’tiādīsu upa-saddo viya anatthako, nāpi ‘‘sañjānanaṃ pajānana’’ntiādīsu saṃ-saddādayo viya atthantaradīpakoti dasseti. ‘‘Pavattitabbaṭṭhānamhiyeva vā pavattattā’’ti iminā ca anussatiyā anussaritabbānurūpatā vuttā hotīti pavattakasseva anurūpataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kulaputtassa anurūpā’’ti vuttaṃ, saddhāpabbajitassa vā kulaputtassa. Anurūpatā nāma pavattitabbaṭṭhānassa anurūpatāya eva hotīti pavattakasseva anurūpatā vuttā, na ubhayassa. Anurūpāti ca yuttāti attho. Buddhanti ye guṇe upādāya bhagavati ‘‘buddho’’ti paññatti, te guṇe ekajjhaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘buddhaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etamadhivacana’’nti. Ārabbhāti ālambitvā. Dhammanti pariyattidhammena saddhiṃ navavidhampi lokuttaradhammaṃ. Nanu ca nibbānaṃ visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvena vakkhati? Kiñcāpi vakkhati, dhammabhāvasāmaññena pana maggaphalehi saddhiṃ idha pāḷiyā saṅgahitattā tassāpi dhammānussatikammaṭṭhāne gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, asaṅkhatāmatādibhāvena pana maggaphalehi visiṭṭhatāya tassa visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvena gahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Sīlānussatiādīnaṃ pana tissannaṃ anussatīnaṃ visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvena gahaṇaṃ yogāvacarassa attano eva sīlassa cāgassa saddhādīnañca anussatiṭṭhānabhāvena gahetabbattā. Rūpakāyaṃ gatāti attano karajakāyaṃ ārabbha ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattā. Kāyeti kāye visayabhūte. Koṭṭhāsanimittārammaṇāyāti kesādikoṭṭhāsesu paṭikkūlanimittārammaṇāya. Ito purimāsu sattasu anussatīsu natthi nimittuppatti , idha atthīti dassanatthaṃ nimitta-ggahaṇaṃ. Tathā assāsapassāsanimittārammaṇāyāti etthāpi. Upasamanti sabbasaṅkhārūpasamaṃ, nibbānanti attho.
124 124.“决断净信”是指如实了知佛功德后生起的净信,是通过圣道而来的净信,或者与之相似的、不被各种邪见之风所动摇、不可动摇的净信。具足这种净信的人,其佛随念的修习才能成功,其他人则不能。“在合适的住处”是指在如前所述远离十八种过失、具足五支的住处。“独处”是指独自一人。这显示了身远离。“宴默”是指从种种所缘中收摄回来,即从外在的各种所缘中退转回来,专注于业处,其含义是心善密合。如此,即依此经文中所示的方法。显示巴利原文
124. Avecca buddhaguṇe yāthāvato ñatvā uppanno pasādo aveccappasādo, ariyamaggena āgatappasādo, taṃsadisopi vā yo diṭṭhigatavātehi acalo asampakampiyo, tena samannāgatena. Tādisassa buddhānussatibhāvanā ijjhati, na itarassa. Patirūpasenāsaneti yathāvuttaaṭṭhārasadosavajjite pañcaṅgasamannāgate senāsane. Rahogatenāti rahasi gatena. Tena kāyavivekaṃ dasseti. Paṭisallīnenāti nānārammaṇato paṭisallīnena, bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇato paṭikkamāpetvā kammaṭṭhāne sallīnena, susiliṭṭhacittenāti attho. Evanti imāya pāḷiyā āgatanayena.
“彼世尊”中的“彼”,指那位已圆满三十波罗蜜、摧破一切烦恼、证悟无上正自觉、超越诸天与诸梵、为世间怙主,由于具足吉祥等因而在天人世间普被称扬为“世尊”的觉者。“世尊”于此是对导师名称的称扬。正如所说:“‘世尊’并非母亲所取的名号”等。然而,下文中的“世尊”则是就功德而称扬。为了显示应将“阿拉汉”等九处一一配上“依此”之义来随念佛的功德,故说“他随念:‘依此,世尊是阿拉汉……依此,世尊是世尊’”。“依此”一词如同在“这是真实的,这是确实的”等句中那样,具有令近在目前的作用;而“pi”一词则有总括的作用,由此便显示了这些功德的众多性。为了表明修习者在修习这些功德之因时,应令其现前于心,故说“这是说‘以此因及彼因’”。显示巴利原文
So bhagavāti ettha soti yo so samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho devānaṃ atidevo brahmānaṃ atibrahmā lokanātho bhāgyavantatādīhi kāraṇehi sadevake loke ‘‘bhagavā’’ti patthaṭakittisaddo, so. Bhagavāti idaṃ satthu nāmakittanaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kata’’ntiādi (mahāni. 198, 210; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 2). Parato pana bhagavāti guṇakittanaṃ. Arahantiādīsu navasu ṭhānesu paccekaṃ itipi-saddaṃ yojetvā buddhaguṇā anussaritabbāti dassento ‘‘itipi arahaṃ…pe… itipi bhagavāti anussaratī’’ti āha. ‘‘Itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ itipetaṃ taccha’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.6) viya iti-saddo āsannapaccakkhakaraṇattho, pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho. Tena nesaṃ bahubhāvo dīpito, tāni ca guṇasallakkhaṇakāraṇāni bhāventena cittassa sammukhībhūtāni kātabbānīti dassento ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti āha.
125 所谓“远”,是如同“近”一样,依相对而说的。为显示最为极致的远性,故说“极远”。“极远”的意思是:因极为遥远而称为远。为显示这种从烦恼而言的远性,是由于那些烦恼已被彻底断除,故说“因为以道摧毁了烦恼”。难道其他漏尽者不也断除了那些烦恼吗?有鉴于此问难,故说“连同习气”。因为除了世尊,余人皆无法将烦恼连同习气一并断除。由此便显示了世尊的阿拉汉果与其他人的不共之处。那么,什么是“习气”呢?即使烦恼已断,仍残存一种由烦恼所安立的、能引发与未断烦恼时相似行为的特殊能力,如同具寿毕陵达瓦差的卑语习气那般。问:说“远离”时,何以能得出“从烦恼”这一含义?答:因为总说之词可安立于别义,而别义之词不必用于总说。此处可引“他的那些恶不善法已远离”等经文为证。于此,“ārakā”一词,通过缩短“ā”、将“ka”转为“ha”并加上随韵,依语法规则应知“araha”一词的成就。为便于理解上述含义,故说偈颂:“他因此名为远离。”其中,“具足者”即具有者;“不具足”指不拥有、不具足、不共存。显示巴利原文
125. Dūratā nāma āsannatā viya upādāyupādāya vuccatīti paramukkaṃsagataṃ dūrabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘suvidūravidūre’’ti āha, suṭṭhu vidūrabhāveneva vidūreti attho. Sā panassa kilesato dūratā tesaṃ sabbaso pahīnattāti dassento āha ‘‘maggena kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattā’’ti. Nanu aññesampi khīṇāsavānaṃ te pahīnā evāti anuyogaṃ manasi katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘savāsanāna’’nti. Na hi bhagavantaṃ ṭhapetvā aññe saha vāsanāya kilese pahātuṃ sakkonti , etena aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ bhagavato arahattanti dassitaṃ hoti. Kā panāyaṃ vāsanā nāma? Pahīnakilesassāpi appahīnakilesassa payogasadisapayogahetubhūto kilesanihito sāmatthiyaviseso āyasmato pilindavacchassa (pārā. 621) vasalasamudācāranimittaṃ viya. Kathaṃ pana ‘‘ārakā’’ti vutte ‘‘kilesehī’’ti ayamattho labbhatīti? Sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato, visesatthinā ca visesassa anupayojetabbato, ‘‘ārakāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā’’tiādīni (ma. ni. 1.434) suttapadānettha udāharitabbāni. Ārakāti cettha ā-kārassa rassattaṃ, ka-kārassa ca ha-kāraṃ, sānusāraṃ katvā niruttinayena ‘‘araha’’nti padasiddhi veditabbā. Vuttamevatthaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘so tato ārakā nāmā’’ti gāthābandhamāha. Tattha samañjanasīlo samaṅgī, na samaṅgitā asamaṅgitā asamannāgamo asahavuttitā.
126 由于作无利益之事,烦恼本身即是敌人,故称“烦恼敌”。本来应当说“由于杀灭敌人,故为杀敌者”,但依语法规则而说为“阿拉汉”。显示巴利原文
126. Anatthacaraṇena kilesā eva arayoti kilesārayo. ‘‘Arīnaṃ hatattā arihā’’ti vattabbe niruttinayena ‘‘araha’’nti vuttaṃ.
127 其中所谓“此即轮回之轮”,是关联语。正如车轮的轮毂是其根本部分,无明、有、渴爱所成的一对,分别安立在内、在外,故说“无明、有、渴爱所成之轮毂”。与轮毂和轮辋的关联相似,以无明、渴爱、老死为缘与果,与之相关联的福行等诸行,故说“福等诸行为轮辐”。由于老死在一切有中作为边际而显著,故将老死置于轮辋之位,说为“老死为轮辋”。又如车轴是车轮运转的主要因,轮回之轮的运转则以漏的集起为主要因,故说“以漏集所成之轴贯穿”。漏正是无明等的因,故称漏集。如所说:“由漏集起故,无明集起”。异熟、造业、色等差别,即欲有等三有,此即车乘,于此三有车乘中。由各自的缘平等地、或自始完全地联结,故为善联结。因在无始的时间中流转,故说为无始时流转。显示巴利原文
127. Yañcetaṃ saṃsāracakkanti sambandho. Rathacakkassa nābhi viya mūlāvayavabhūtaṃ anto, bahi ca samavaṭṭhitaṃ avijjābhavataṇhāmayaṃ dvayanti vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhī’’ti. Nābhiyā, nemiyā ca sambandhā arasadisā paccayaphalabhūtehi avijjātaṇhājarāmaraṇehi sambandhā puññādisaṅkhārāti vuttaṃ ‘‘puññādiabhisaṅkhārāra’’nti. Tattha tattha bhave pariyantabhāvena pākaṭaṃ jarāmaraṇanti taṃ nemiṭṭhāniyaṃ katvā āha ‘‘jarāmaraṇanemī’’ti. Yathā ca rathacakkapavattiyā padhānakāraṇaṃ akkho, evaṃ saṃsāracakkapavattiyā āsavasamudayoti āha ‘‘āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā’’ti. Āsavā eva avijjādīnaṃ kāraṇattā āsavasamudayo. Yathāha ‘‘āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103). Vipākakaṭattārūpappabhedo kāmabhavādiko tibhavo eva ratho, tasmiṃ tibhavarathe. Attano paccayehi samaṃ, sabbaso vā ādito paṭṭhāya yojitanti samāyojitaṃ. Ādirahitaṃ kālaṃ pavattatīti katvā anādikālappavattaṃ.
诸蕴的次第,以及界、处,
无有间断地流转着,即称为“轮回”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, ‘saṃsāro’ti pavuccatī’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.95 apasādanāvaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.60; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.199) –
如此所说的轮回即是轮回之轮。‘以此’指依凭世尊。‘于菩提座’中,‘菩提’指名为菩提的智慧,‘座’则表示达到坛场状态的地方或时机。‘以精进之足’指在自己称为精进的双足之中,此双足以两种方式运转——在杂染分与清净分中分别执行抑制与安立的功用。‘于戒地’中,戒自身因具有安立之义而称为地,于其上安立,即通过成就而安立。‘以信之手’中,信因执持无过法而如同手,以此而说。‘业尽作者’指因能尽断身业等一切种类的业,故称为业尽作者。‘智斧’指取起在定石上磨得极锐利的道智之斧。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttasaṃsārova saṃsāracakkaṃ. Anenāti bhagavatā. Bodhimaṇḍeti bodhisaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa maṇḍabhāvappatte ṭhāne, kāle vā. Vīriyapādehīti saṃkilesavodānapakkhiyesu sannirumbhanasannikkhipanakiccatāya dvidhā pavattehi attano vīriyasaṅkhātehi pādehi. Sīlapathaviyanti patiṭṭhaṭṭhena sīlameva pathavī, tassaṃ. Patiṭṭhāyāti sampādanavasena patiṭṭhahitvā. Saddhāhatthenāti anavajjadhammādānasādhanato saddhāva hattho, tena. Kammakkhayakaranti kāyakammādibhedassa sabbassapi kammassa khayakaraṇato kammakkhayakaraṃ. Ñāṇapharasunti samādhisilāyaṃ sunisitamaggañāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā.
128 如此,在‘因已断除轮辐’这一句里,将所述断除轮辐的轮回理解为犹如轮子,作了义理联结之后,现在为以缘起说法的次第显示它,而说‘或者’等。其中,‘无始轮回转’指念念相续、不知开端、无有边际的轮回圈。其余从行开始至生结束的十法,则是轮辐。如何呢?为了显示因无明为根、因老死为边际而与轮毂、轮辋相关联,所以说‘因无明为根、因老死为边际’。‘于苦等中’即对于苦、集、灭、道。其中,对苦的无知,因含摄于彼苦之中而又遮蔽彼苦;对其余诸谛,则唯以遮蔽为义。此处‘苦’意指苦圣谛,因此将其依欲有等分为三类,并依次显示如此遮蔽彼苦的无明,以及在无明等缘下于三有中的行等,而说‘于欲有有无明’等。其中,‘于欲有有无明’指遮蔽欲有过患的无明。于色有、无色有有无明,以此类推。‘于欲有之行’指属于欲地的诸行,或将在欲有中成就的诸行,即能产生欲有转生的行。‘成为缘’指对于福行而言,首先以所缘缘和依止缘两种方式成为缘;对于非福行,对俱生者以俱生等方式,对非俱生者以无间、等无间等方式,对非无间者则以所缘缘和依止缘方式成为缘。‘于无色有之行’即不动行。成为缘,唯以显示巴利原文
128. Evaṃ ‘‘arānaṃ hatattā’’ti ettha vuttaaraghāte saṃsāraṃ cakkaṃ viya cakkanti gahetvā atthayojanaṃ katvā idāni paṭiccasamuppādadesanākkamenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha anamataggaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭanti anu anu amataggaṃ aviññātakoṭikaṃ saṃsāramaṇḍalaṃ. Sesā dasa dhammā saṅkhārādayo jātipariyosānā arā. Kathaṃ? Nābhiyā avijjāya mūlato, nemiyā jarāmaraṇena antato sambandhattāti dassento āha ‘‘avijjāmūlakattā jarāmaraṇapariyantattā cā’’ti. Dukkhādīsūti dukkhasamudayanirodhamaggesu. Tattha dukkhe aññāṇaṃ tadantogadhattā, tappaṭicchādanato ca, sesesu paṭicchādanatova. Dukkhanti cettha dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ adhippetanti taṃ kāmabhavādivasena tidhā bhinditvā tathā tappaṭicchādikaṃ avijjaṃ, avijjādipaccaye tīsu bhavesu saṅkhārādike ca paṭipāṭiyā dassento ‘‘kāmabhave ca avijjā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kāmabhave avijjāti kāmabhave ādīnavappaṭicchādikā avijjā. Rūpabhave arūpabhave avijjāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Kāmabhave saṅkhārānanti kāmabhūmipariyāpannānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ, kāmabhave vā nipphādetabbā ye saṅkhārā, tesaṃ kāmabhavūpapattinibbattakasaṅkhārānanti attho. Paccayo hotīti puññābhisaṅkhārānaṃ tāva ārammaṇapaccayena ceva upanissayapaccayena cāti dvidhā paccayo hoti. Apuññābhisaṅkhāresu sahajātassa sahajātādivasena , asahajātassa anantarasamanantarādivasena, nānantarassa pana ārammaṇavasena ceva upanissayavasena ca paccayo hoti. Arūpabhave saṅkhārānanti āneñjābhisaṅkhārānaṃ . Paccayo hoti upanissayavaseneva. Imasmiṃ panatthe ettha vitthāriyamāne atippapañco hoti, sayameva ca parato āgamissatīti na naṃ vitthārayāma.
‘三处’指眼处、耳处、意处。‘一处’指意处。依照此理,触等的分别也应了知。‘处处彼彼渴爱’即色渴爱等不同类别,是在欲有等处所生起的渴爱。显示巴利原文
Tiṇṇaṃ āyatanānanti cakkhusotamanāyatanānaṃ. Ekassāyatanassāti manāyatanassa. Iminā nayena phassādīnampi vibhāgo veditabbo. Tattha tattha sā sā taṇhāti rūpataṇhādibhedā tattha tattha kāmabhavādīsu uppajjanakā taṇhā.
以渴爱等为根本的论述过于简略,因此,为了对取与有加以分别并详细显示,便说“如何”等语。其中,以“我将享受诸欲”此语说欲渴爱的转起,同样,以“我将享受天界成就”等语。然而,这种渴爱由于以强力执取的方式转起,便称为欲取,故说“以欲取为缘”——正是以欲取为缘。显示巴利原文
Taṇhādimūlikā kathā atisaṃkhittāti taṃ, upādānabhave ca vibhajitvā vitthāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘kāme paribhuñjissāmī’’ti iminā kāmataṇhāpavattimāha. Tathā ‘‘saggasampattiṃ anubhavissāmī’’tiādīhi. Sā pana taṇhā yasmā bhusamādānavasena pavattamānā kāmupādānaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāmupādānapaccayā’’ti. Tathevāti kāmupādānapaccayā eva.
所谓“梵天界的成就”,即于色界梵天中的成就。根据“一切三界之法,依可欲之义而称为欲”的说法,故将有爱也视为欲取,而说“即由欲取为缘而修习慈”等。在其余以取为根本的修习中,此处的连接如下——此处,有人执持“无有他世”的断灭见,他由见取为缘而以身行恶行等,应如前述方式连接。另一人执持“在某成就有的状态中,自我断灭”的断灭见,他为了往生彼处而以身行善行等,同样应如前述方式连接。又有人执持“成为有色、意所成之后,自我断灭”的断灭见,为了往生色界而修习道;其修习圆满等,一切应如前述方式了知。又有人执持“生于无色有之后,自我断灭”的断灭见,为了往生无色界而修习道;其修习圆满等,一切应如前述方式了知。应知,仅此也解释了以我语取为根本的连接。同样,依“现法涅槃论”也可了知连接。又有人执持“依戒而清净”、“以不净道为净道”等错误执取,由戒禁取为缘而以身行恶行等,一切应如前述方式连接。显示巴利原文
Brahmalokasampattinti rūpībrahmaloke sampattiṃ. ‘‘Sabbepi tebhūmakā dhammā kāmanīyaṭṭhena kāmā’’ti (mahāni. 1; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 8 thoka visadisaṃ) vacanato bhavarāgopi kāmupādānamevāti katvā ‘‘kāmupādānapaccayā eva mettaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sesupādānamūlikāsupīti etthāyaṃ yojanā – idhekacco ‘‘natthi paro loko’’ti natthikadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, so diṭṭhupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ caratītiādi vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ. Aparo ‘‘asukasmiṃ sampattibhave attā ucchijjatī’’ti ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, so tatrūpapattiyā kāyena sucaritaṃ caratītiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Aparo ‘‘rūpī manomayo hutvā attā ucchijjatī’’ti rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti. Bhāvanāpāripūriyāti sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Aparo ‘‘arūpabhave uppajjitvā attā ucchijjatī’’ti arūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti. Bhāvanāpāripūriyāti sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Etāhiyeva attavādupādānamūlikāpi yojanā saṃvaṇṇitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādavasenāpi yojanā veditabbā. Aparo ‘‘sīlena suddhī’’ti ‘‘asuddhimaggaṃ suddhimaggo’’ti parāmasanto sīlabbatupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ caratītiādinā sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.
现在,为了显示在展示轮回之轮时,以“在欲有中,无明是诸行的缘”等方式所开示的无明等的缘性,以及诸行等的缘生性,即引用《无碍解道》的巴利文,以结摄的方式加以显示,而说“如是此”等。其中,如同诸行由因而生,无明也由欲漏等而有因,故说“此二者皆由因而生”。所谓的“缘的把握”,即对名色的诸缘——无明等加以确定而把握,此处为应成就处所用之处格。“慧”是指被称为度疑清净的、依诸行相而了知的慧。“法住智”即对缘起的通达。而此法住智,由于以超越三世疑网的方式而转起,故说“于过去时”等。依此方式,即如“无明为因”等、于无明中所说的方式,应将“诸行为因,识为因所生”等一切句详细展开。显示巴利原文
Idāni yvāyaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ dassentena ‘‘kāmabhave avijjā kāmabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hotī’’tiādinā avijjādīnaṃ paccayabhāvo, saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayuppannabhāvo ca dassito, tameva paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiṃ ānetvā nigamanavasena dassento ‘‘evaṃ aya’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yathā saṅkhārā hetunibbattā, evaṃ avijjāpi kāmāsavādinā sahetukā evāti āha ‘‘ubhopete hetusamuppannā’’ti. Paccayapariggaheti nāmarūpassa paccayānaṃ avijjādīnaṃ paricchijja gahaṇe, nipphādetabbe bhummaṃ. Paññāti kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhisaṅkhātā pakārato jānanā. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti paṭiccasamuppādāvabodho. Idañca dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ yasmā addhāttaye kaṅkhāmalavitaraṇavasena pavattati, tasmā ‘‘atītampi addhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Eteneva nayenāti etena ‘‘avijjā hetū’’tiādinā avijjāyaṃ vuttena nayena. ‘‘Saṅkhārā hetu, viññāṇaṃ hetusamuppanna’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.46) sabbapadāni vitthāretabbāni.
所谓‘略说’,在此是指无明等与识等,亦即因与果。或者,因为因与果被略说,故称‘略说’,即无明等与识等。应知,因略说之共性而使用了单数。这些略说依时间划分,有过去之因、现在之果,现在之因、未来之果,如此成为四种,故说‘此处,前略说是过去时’等。或者,‘略说’一词是部分的名称,因此过去的因部分是第一略说,其余同理。爱、取、有,由于与烦恼、业的状态相通,且若无它们,无明与诸行便不能完成各自的作用,故已被含摄其中。业与爱成为助成之因,以转起之义而为业轮。显示巴利原文
Saṃkhippanti ettha avijjādayo, viññāṇādayo cāti saṅkhepo, hetu, vipāko ca. Hetu vipākoti vā saṃkhippatīti saṅkhepo, avijjādayo viññāṇādayo ca. Saṅkhepabhāvasāmaññena pana ekavacanaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Te pana saṅkhepā atīte hetu, etarahi vipāko, etarahi hetu, āyatiṃ vipākoti evaṃ kālavibhāgena cattāro jātā. Tenāha ‘‘purimasaṅkhepo cettha atīto addhā’’tiādi. Saṅkhepa-saddo vā bhāgādhivacananti atīto hetubhāgo paṭhamo saṅkhepo. Esa nayo sesesupi. Taṇhupādānabhavā gahitāva honti kilesakammabhāvasāmaññato, tehi vinā avijjāsaṅkhārānaṃ sakiccākaraṇato ca. Kammaṃ taṇhā ca tassa sahakārīkāraṇaṃ hutvā vaṭṭanatthena kammavaṭṭaṃ.
识、名色、六处、触、受的生、老、坏灭之相,被称作‘生、老、死’,因此说‘由于以生、老、死之名称而开示了识等’。这些就是识等。未来的果轮,涵摄了从现在之因将生起的未来(果)。它们就是无明等。从行相而言:虽未依自性而说,但在各各略说中,它们被汇集,通过把握无明、诸行等而显示出来,故为‘行相’;或者,过去因等的类别即是行相,因此说‘从行相’。依过去因五支等分类,有二十种。显示巴利原文
Viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanānaṃ jātijarābhaṅgāvatthā ‘‘jātijarāmaraṇa’’nti vuttāti āha ‘‘jātijarāmaraṇāpadesenaviññāṇādīnaṃniddiṭṭhattā’’ti. Imeti viññāṇādayo. Āyatiṃ vipākavaṭṭaṃ paccuppannahetuto bhāvīnaṃ anāgatānaṃ gahitattā. Teti avijjādayo. Ākāratoti sarūpato avuttāpi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ saṅgahe ākirīyanti avijjāsaṅkhārādiggahaṇehi pakāsīyantīti ākārā, atītahetuādīnaṃ vā pakārā ākārā, tato ākārato. Vīsatividhā honti atītehetupañcakādibhedato.
诸行与识之间有一个连结,因为果从因无间断地转起,故为因与果之关系性的一个连结。同样,有与生之间也是如此。而受与爱之间,因为因从果无间断地转起,故为果与因之关系性的一个连结。因为即使是果法,也成为其他因性之法的缘。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhāraviññāṇānaṃ antarā eko sandhīti hetuto phalassa avicchedappavattibhāvato hetuphalasambandhabhūto eko sandhi. Tathā bhavajātīnamantarā. Vedanātaṇhānamantarā pana phalato hetuno avicchedappavattibhāvato phalahetusambandhabhūto eko sandhi. Phalabhūtopi hi dhammo aññassa hetusabhāvassa dhammassa paccayo hotīti.
“如是”是对所述方式的指称,故说“四略说”等。“以一切行相”:即以此处已说及未说的——在《缘起分别》(《分别论》225等)中、在无边际理趣与一切处论等中所说——一切行相而了知。“知”即明了通达。“见”即以见为体的智眼而现前亲见。“了知”即通达,此为同义语。“彼”即彼已了知。“以已知之义”:即依如实状态而了知之义。“以遍知之义”:即以无常等行相而通达之义。显示巴利原文
Itīti vuttappakāraparāmasanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘catusaṅkhepa’’ntiādi. Sabbākāratoti idha vuttehi, avuttehi ca paṭiccasamuppādavibhaṅge (vibha. 225 ādayo), anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānādīsu ca āgatehi sabbehi ākārehi. Jānātīti avabujjhati. Passatīti dassanabhūtena ñāṇacakkhunā paccakkhato passati. Aññāti paṭivijjhatīti tesaṃyeva vevacanaṃ. Tanti taṃ jānanaṃ. Ñātaṭṭhenāti yathāsabhāvato jānanaṭṭhena. Pajānanaṭṭhenāti aniccādīhi pakārehi paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena.
现在,为了显示此有轮被引用于此的目的,而说“以此”等。其中,“他们法”是指那些无明等法。“如实了知已”:即以大金刚智如实了知已。如是贯穿:厌离者、以强力毗婆舍那而离染者、解脱者、以诸圣道而杀贼者。其中,当世尊离染、解脱时,即名为杀贼。此后,则取正等觉之刹那而说“已杀、已破、已坏”等。显示巴利原文
Idāni yadatthamidaṃ bhavacakkaṃ idhānītaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘iminā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha te dhammeti te avijjādike dhamme. Yathābhūtaṃ ñatvāti mahāvajirañāṇena yāthāvato jānitvā. Nibbindanto balavavipassanāya virajjanto vimuccanto ariyamaggehi are hanīti yojanā. Tattha yadā bhagavā virajjati vimuccati, tadā are hanati nāma. Tato paraṃ pana abhisambuddhakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘hani vihani viddhaṃsesī’’ti.
129 转轮圣王无生命的轮宝出现时,世人便就地对其供养,其他地方的供养殊胜便随之断绝。更何况正自觉者出现呢?为了显示此义,而说“当如来出现时”等。至于“其他供养殊胜又算什么呢?”意即:与前述相比,那些由权势较小的诸天与人们所作的、并非极为崇高的其他供养殊胜,在应供的状态面前,又有什么可说的呢?“与义相应”:即与阿罗汉果之义相应、随顺其义。显示巴利原文
129. Cakkavattino acetane cakkaratane uppanne tattheva loko pūjaṃ karoti, aññattha pūjāvisesā pacchijjanti, kimaṅgaṃ pana sammāsambuddhe uppanneti dassento ‘‘uppanne tathāgate’’tiādimāha. Ko pana vādo aññesaṃ pūjāvisesānanti yathāvuttato aññesaṃ amahesakkhehi devamanussehi kariyamānānaṃ nātiuḷārānaṃ pūjāvisesānaṃ arahabhāve kā nāma kathā. Atthānurūpanti arahattatthassa anurūpaṃ anvatthaṃ.
130 “因恶名之怖”的意思是,因为畏惧名声不佳而怖畏。有人暗地里作恶,心想“别让任何人知道”,而世尊从不如此,因为在菩提树下,诸恶之因早已被彻底断除。另一种解释:“远离”即阿拉汉,其义正是“极为遥远”。为何是极为遥远呢?那些身未修、戒未修、心未修、慧未修,因而未断贪嗔痴、不通达圣法、于圣法中未得调伏、未见圣法、未行正道而行邪道的人,世尊与他们极为遥远。正如世尊所说:显示巴利原文
130.Asilokabhayenāti akittibhayena. Raho pāpaṃ karonti ‘‘mā naṃ koci jaññā’’ti esa bhagavā na kadāci karoti pāpahetūnaṃ bodhimaṇḍe eva suppahīnattā. Aparo nayo – ārakāti arahaṃ, suvidūrabhāvatoicceva attho. Kuto pana suvidūrabhāvatoti? Ye abhāvitakāyā abhāvitasīlā abhāvitacittā abhāvitapaññā, tato eva appahīnarāgadosamohā ariyadhammassa akovidā ariyadhamme avinītā ariyadhammassa adassāvino appaṭipannā micchāpaṭipannā ca, tato suvidūrabhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“诸比丘,即使有比丘抓住我的僧伽梨衣角,步步紧随,跟在身后,但他若贪求五欲、欲贪强烈、心怀嗔恚、意存恶念、失念不正知、心不寂静、散乱、诸根放逸,那么他实是远离我,我也远离他。这是什么原因呢?诸比丘,因为那位比丘不见法,不见法者便不见我。”(《如是语》92)显示巴利原文
‘‘Saṅghāṭikaṇṇecepi me, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gahetvā piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandho assa pāde pādaṃ nikkhipanto, so ca hoti abhijjhālu kāmesu tibbasārāgo byāpannacitto paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo muṭṭhassati asampajāno asamāhito vibbhantacitto pākatindriyo. Atha kho so ārakāva mayhaṃ, ahañca tassa. Taṃ kissa hetu? Dhammaṃ hi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na passati, dhammaṃ apassanto maṃ na passatī’’ti (itivu. 92).
因为如前所述的那些人,即使从早到晚都住在导师身边,也不能因此就说他们“在导师近处”,导师对他们而言也是如此。因此,阿拉汉即是远离恶人、与恶人相去遥远。显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttapuggalā hi sacepi sāyaṃ pātaṃ satthu santikāvacarāva siyuṃ, na te tāvatā ‘‘satthu santikā’’ti vattabbā, tathā satthāpi nesaṃ. Iti asappurisānaṃ ārakā dūreti arahaṃ.
那些志向低劣之人,不行正道而行;
世尊远离他们,因此被认为‘阿罗汉’是遥远的。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sammā na paṭipajjanti, ye nihīnāsayā narā; Ārakā tehi bhagavā, dūre tenārahaṃ mato’’ti.
同样地,“远离”即指阿罗汉,其义为“极为亲近”。为何是极为亲近呢?那些身已修、戒已修、心已修、慧已修,从而已断除贪嗔痴、通达圣法、善受圣法调伏、已见圣法、正行道之人,世尊与他们极为亲近。世尊也曾这样说:显示巴利原文
Tathā ārakāti arahaṃ, āsannabhāvatoti attho. Kuto pana āsannabhāvatoti? Ye bhāvitakāyā bhāvitasīlā bhāvitacittā bhāvitapaññā, tato eva pahīnarāgadosamohā ariyadhammassa kovidā ariyadhamme suvinītā ariyadhammassa dassāvino sammāpaṭipannā, tato āsannabhāvato. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
诸比丘,即使有比丘住在离我百由旬之处,若他不贪着诸欲、无强烈欲贪、心无嗔恚、意无恶念,正念现前、正知、心得定、心一境性、守护根门,那么他实是近我身旁,我亦近他身旁。何以故?诸比丘,彼比丘见法,见法者即见我。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yojanasate cepi me, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vihareyya, so ca hoti anabhijjhālu kāmesu na tibbasārāgo abyāpannacitto appaduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo upaṭṭhitassati sampajāno samāhito ekaggacitto saṃvutindriyo. Atha kho so santikeva mayhaṃ, ahañca tassa. Taṃ kissa hetu? Dhammaṃ hi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu passati, dhammaṃ passanto maṃ passatī’’ti (itivu. 92).
像那样的人,即使与导师相隔千由旬,也不能因此说他们‘远离导师’,同样,导师对他们亦非远离。是故,阿罗汉即是这样:善人纵在远方,亦为亲近。显示巴利原文
Tathārūpā hi puggalā satthu yojanasahassantarikāpi honti, na tāvatā te ‘‘satthu dūracārino’’ti vattabbā, tathā satthāpi nesaṃ. Iti sappurisānaṃ ārakā āsanneti arahaṃ.
那些如理行道、志向极其殊胜者,
虽近而实已远离,由此故为阿拉汉、胜者。
显示巴利原文 Ye sammā paṭipajjanti, suppaṇītādhimuttikā; Ārakā tehi āsanne, tenāpi arahaṃ jino.
那些贪等恶法,若在某一相续中生起,便会带来现世与来世的祸害,且与导向涅槃之道全然相违。致力于圆满自他利益、正行修习的善士们,理当将这些法远远舍离、断除,故称之为“应远离的”(rahā)。而这些恶法,世尊于菩提树下,便以圣道彻底断除、根绝了。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Ye ime rāgādayo pāpadhammā yasmiṃ santāne uppajjanti, tassa diṭṭhadhammikampi samparāyikampi anatthaṃ āvahanti. Nibbānagāminiyā paṭipadāya ekaṃseneva ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā ca, te attahitaṃ, parahitañca paripūretuṃ sammā paṭipajjantehi sādhūhi dūrato rahitabbā pariccajitabbā pahātabbāti rahā nāma, te ca yasmā bhagavato bodhimūleyeva ariyamaggena sabbaso pahīnā samucchinnā. Yathāha –
“婆罗门,如来已断除贪、嗔、痴,一切恶不善法皆已断尽,根拔除尽,如截断的多罗树头,归于无有,于未来世永不再生。”(巴利,第9-10节,义旨相同)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tathāgatassa kho, brāhmaṇa, rāgo pahīno doso moho, sabbepi pāpakā akusalā dhammā pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṃkatā āyatiṃ anuppādadhammā’’ti (pārā. 9-10 atthato samānaṃ).
因此,他完全没有这些‘应远离的恶法’,应说为‘arah’;随顺音韵,将‘o’替换成‘a’,便说为‘arahaṃ’(阿拉汉)。显示巴利原文
Tasmā sabbaso na santi etassa rahāti arahoti vattabbe okārassa sānusāraṃ a-kārādesaṃ katvā ‘‘araha’’nti vuttaṃ.
恶法名为‘应远离的’,因为善士应当远离它们;
由于世尊已将它们彻底断除,故称‘阿拉汉’。
显示巴利原文 Pāpadhammā rahā nāma, sādhūhi rahitabbato; Tesaṃ suṭṭhu pahīnattā, bhagavā arahaṃ mato.
那些遍知诸蕴、断尽烦恼、修习正道、亲证寂灭的漏尽阿罗汉,那些尚未证得无上瑜伽安稳、心怀希求而住的有学,以及那些修行清净、志向贤善、具足信戒闻等功德的人们——世尊不为他们所远离、所舍弃,世尊也不远离他们,因此名为“阿罗汉”。事实上,圣弟子们因现见导师所示现的法,故与导师的法身从未分离。正如具寿宾吉耶所说:显示巴利原文
Ye te sabbaso pariññātakkhandhā pahīnakilesā bhāvitamaggā sacchikatanirodhā arahanto khīṇāsavā, ye ca sekkhā appattamānasā anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ patthayamānā viharanti, ye ca parisuddhapayogā kalyāṇajjhāsayā saddhāsīlasutādiguṇasampannā puggalā, tehi na rahitabbo na pariccajitabbo, te ca bhagavatāti arahaṃ. Tathā hi ariyapuggalā satthārā diṭṭhadhammassa paccakkhakaraṇato satthu dhammasarīrena avirahitā eva honti. Yathāha āyasmā piṅgiyo –
我以心、以眼观察此人,
婆罗门,我日夜精勤不放逸;
我于恭敬礼拜中,度过此夜,
正因如此,我认为没有分离。
信、喜、意、念,
这些都不离乔达摩的教法;
具广慧者无论前往何方,
我即以其法为依止,不转向他处。”(《经集》1148-1149)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Passāmi naṃ manasā cakkhunāva, Rattindivaṃ brāhmaṇa appamatto; Namassamāno vivasemi rattiṃ, Teneva maññāmi avippavāsaṃ. ‘‘Saddhā ca pīti ca mano sati ca, Nāpentime gotamasāsanamhā; Yaṃ yaṃ disaṃ vajati bhūripañño, Sa tena teneva natohamasmī’’ti. (su. ni. 1148-1149);
正是因此,他们不皈依其他导师。恰如所说:显示巴利原文
Teneva ca te aññaṃ satthāraṃ na uddisanti. Yathāha –
“诸比丘,这是不可能的,无有是处,一位见具足者会皈依其他导师,这是不存在的。”(《中部》3.128;《增支部》1.276)显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.128; a. ni. 1.276).
即使是善凡夫,大多也对导师怀有不退转的净信。因此,由于善行殊胜之人既不应远离(世尊),世尊也不远离他们,所以他没有应被善士所舍弃的“远离处”(即应弃舍的过恶),故为阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Kalyāṇaputhujjanāpi yebhuyyena satthari niccalasaddhā eva honti. Iti suppaṭipannehi purisavisesehi avirahitabbato, tesañca avirahanato na santi etassa rahā pariccajanakā, natthi vā etassa raho sādhūhi pariccajitabbatāti arahaṃ.
那些亲证正法、行境清净的圣者,
救护者不远离他们,因此被称为‘阿拉汉’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ye sacchikatasaddhammā, ariyā suddhagocarā; Na tehi rahito hoti, nātho tenārahaṃ mato’’ti.
‘Raho’意为离去。世尊已无在诸趣中流转的轮回之行,因为能尽业的圣道在菩提树下,已将其连同资粮的业轮彻底摧毁。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Rahoti ca gamanaṃ vuccati, bhagavato ca nānāgatīsu paribbhamanasaṅkhātaṃ saṃsāre gamanaṃ natthi kammakkhayakarena ariyamaggena bodhimūleyeva sabbaso sasambhārassa kammavaṭṭassa viddhaṃsitattā. Yathāha –
依此,我或投生为天,或为乾闼婆,或为飞鸟;
依此,我得夜叉之身,或弃人间之生;
我的那些烦恼已灭尽,已摧毁,如芦摧折,彻底根除。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yena devūpapatyassa, gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo; Yakkhattaṃ yena gaccheyyaṃ, manussattañca abbaje; Te mayhaṃ āsavā khīṇā, viddhastā vinaḷīkatā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.36);
如此,他既无隐秘之行,于诸趣中亦不再生,故称阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ natthi etassa rahogamanaṃ gatīsu paccājātītipi arahaṃ.
凡于轮回中,全然无有隐秘之行;
已断除生死者,称之为阿拉汉、善逝。
显示巴利原文 Raho vā gamanaṃ yassa, saṃsāre natthi sabbaso; Pahīnajātimaraṇo, arahaṃ sugato mato.
世尊因应受赞叹而称为阿罗汉。文字学者将‘阿罗汉’一词解释为‘值得赞叹’。而世尊的应受赞叹之性,非他人所能共有,乃依如实功德而证得,在含天人的世间中善为安立。如此,若依种种功德分别解说,他——以无上戒、无上定、无上慧、无上解脱,成为无等、无等等、无譬、无比、无对者——其功德纵使是智者、天人、梵天,乃至世尊自身,亦无法穷尽。因此,世尊亦因值得赞叹而为阿罗汉。显示巴利原文
Pāsaṃsattā vā bhagavā arahaṃ. Akkharacintakā hi pasaṃsāyaṃ araha-saddaṃ vaṇṇenti. Pāsaṃsabhāvo ca bhagavato anaññasādhāraṇo yathābhuccaguṇādhigato sadevake loke suppatiṭṭhito. Tathā hesa anuttarena sīlena anuttarena samādhinā anuttarāya paññāya anuttarāya vimuttiyā asamo asamasamo appaṭimo appaṭibhāgo appaṭipuggaloti evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ guṇe vibhajitvā vuccamāne paṇḍitapurisehi devehi brahmehi bhagavatā vā pana pariyosāpetuṃ asakkuṇeyyarūpo. Iti pāsaṃsattāpi bhagavā arahaṃ.
因为在含天人的世间中,没有功德与之相等者;
因此,也因应受赞叹,阿罗汉是两足之中的最上者。
显示巴利原文 Guṇehi sadiso natthi, yasmā loke sadevake; Tasmā pāsaṃsiyattāpi, arahaṃ dvipaduttamo.
如是,遍一切时处——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sabbathāpi –
远于愚钝者,亦远于了知者;
因隐秘之事已善断故,亦因于智者不应隐秘;
于诸有中毫无隐藏,堪受赞叹,是阿拉汉、胜者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ārakā mandabuddhīnaṃ, ārakā ca vijānataṃ; Rahānaṃ suppahīnattā, vidūnamaraheyyato; Bhavesu ca rahābhāvā, pāsaṃsā arahaṃ jino’’ti.
131 131. ‘Sammā’意为不颠倒。‘Sāmaṃ’意为自己。在‘Sambuddho’一词中,‘saṃ-’应视为表示‘自己’这一含义的语素。‘Sabbadhammānaṃ’指无余的所知之法。然而,此处如何获得对一切法的觉悟呢?通过对部分的把握。因为,当把握了部分,且除此再无其他时,即可了知所把握者无余,正如‘受戒者不施与’的说法那样。如此,由于不需别立业词,应知‘佛陀’一词仅在主动者意义上成立,不必观待特殊含义。因为此处依字面仅得‘正确地、自己觉悟故,为正自觉者’这么多,而‘一切法’则是从义理上可得而取来说的。并非说觉悟作用无有领域才合理。显示巴利原文
131.Sammāti aviparītaṃ. Sāmanti sayameva. Sambuddhoti hi ettha saṃ-saddo ‘‘saya’’nti etassa atthassa bodhako daṭṭhabbo. Sabbadhammānanti anavasesānaṃ ñeyyadhammānaṃ. Kathaṃ panettha sabbadhammāvabodho labbhatīti? Ekadesassa aggahaṇato. Padesaggahaṇe hi asati gahetabbassa nippadesatāva viññāyati yathā ‘‘dikkhito na dadātī’’ti. Evañca katvā atthavisesānapekkhā kattari eva buddhasaddasiddhi veditabbā kammavacanicchāya abhāvato. ‘‘Sammā sāmaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho’’ti ettakameva hi idha saddato labbhati, ‘‘sabbadhammāna’’nti pana atthato labbhamānaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Na hi bujjhanakiriyā avisayā yujjati.
现在,为了将‘一切法’这一总说的领域加以分别显示,故说‘应证知之法’等。其中,‘应证知’指应以殊胜之智了知者。哪些是应证知之法?即四谛法。从应证知的角度说‘觉悟’,是就应证知的体性而觉悟。在前分以观慧,在证得刹那以道慧,在后分以一切知智等了知,这是其含义。以下各处亦同此理。‘应遍知之法’指苦圣谛。‘应断除’指集谛所摄。‘应作证’是就涅槃而说。然而,此处用复数词表述,是依有余依等道理成立的差别而说,或者这是对四谛法的总说。正如将要宣说的‘眼是苦谛’等那样。总说是依未确定界限的法而作,因为以总说列举的法,仅显其存在,不显界限,故以无界限的复数词而说,如‘无因法、无为法’(《法集论·双论母》7-8)那样。又或者,‘应作证’也包含果与解脱,非仅涅槃,所以用复数表述。同样地,‘应修习’中亦应知包含禅那。显示巴利原文
Idāni tassā visayaṃ ‘‘sabbadhamme’’ti sāmaññato vuttaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘abhiññeyye dhamme’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha abhiññeyyeti abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena jānitabbe. Ke pana teti? Catusaccadhamme. Abhiññeyyato buddhoti abhiññeyyabhāvato bujjhi. Pubbabhāge vipassanāpaññāya, adhigamakkhaṇe maggapaññāya, aparabhāge sabbaññutaññāṇādīhi aññāsīti attho. Ito paresupi eseva nayo. Pariññeyye dhammeti dukkhaṃ ariyasaccamāha. Pahātabbeti samudayapakkhiye. Sacchikātabbeti nibbānaṃ sandhāyāha. Bahuvacananiddeso pana sopādisesādikaṃ pariyāyasiddhaṃ bhedaṃ gahetvā kato, uddeso vā ayaṃ catusaccadhammānanti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘cakkhuṃ dukkhasacca’’ntiādi. Uddeso ca avinicchitatthaparicchedassa dhammassa vasena karīyati. Uddesena hi uddisiyamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ atthitāmattaṃ vuccati, na paricchedoti aparicchedena bahuvacanena vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘appaccayā dhammā, asaṅkhatā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 7-8). Sacchikātabbeti vā phalavimuttīnampi gahaṇaṃ, na nibbānassevāti bahuvacananiddeso kato. Evañca bhāvetabbeti ettha jhānānampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在偈颂中,“应修习”与“ca”字含有未言明的合集义,由此应知即包含了“应作证”之义。因此,“我是觉者”意为:因为四圣谛已被我觉悟,且无任何离开圣谛而应知者,故我觉悟一切应知,即我已遍知。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ bhāvetabbañcāti ettha ca-saddo avuttasamuccayattho, tena sacchikātabbassa gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tasmā buddhosmīti yasmā cattāri saccāni mayā buddhāni, saccavinimuttañca kiñci ñeyyaṃ natthi, tasmā sabbampi ñeyyaṃ buddhosmi, abbhaññāsinti attho.
132 132. 如是,为了将依谛总说之义,连同门、所缘及依门而起的法,以及蕴等,依谛分别显示,而开始“再者”等。其中,“以根本因的方式”是指:即使存在无明等其他因,也以它们中的根本因的方式。因为渴爱既是业种种的因,又由助成而成为苦种种的主要因。“能令生起”即令其产生。“前渴爱”指前生所成的渴爱。“两者”指眼及其集。“不转起”即不转起之相。“灭之知”指以作证现观而通达灭。“以各各句的抽绎”指如“眼、眼之集”等,以各各部分的确定。为显示渴爱也有应遍知的性质,且因包含在取蕴中而摄于苦谛,故说“色渴爱等六渴爱身”。显示巴利原文
132. Evaṃ saccavasena sāmaññato vuttamatthaṃ dvārārammaṇehi saddhiṃ dvārappavattadhammehi, khandhādīhi ca saccavaseneva vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘api cā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha mūlakāraṇabhāvenāti santesupi avijjādīsu aññesu kāraṇesu tesampi mūlabhūtakāraṇabhāvena. Taṇhā hi kammassa vicittabhāvahetuto, sahāyabhāvūpagamanato ca dukkhavicittatāya padhānakāraṇaṃ. Samuṭṭhāpikāti uppādikā. Purimataṇhāti purimabhavasiddhā taṇhā. Ubhinnanti cakkhussa , taṃsamudayassa ca. Appavattīti appavattinimittaṃ. Nirodhapajānanāti sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nirodhassa paṭivijjhanā. Ekekapaduddhārenāti ‘‘cakkhuṃ cakkhusamudayo’’tiādinā ekekakoṭṭhāsaniddhāraṇena . Taṇhāyapi pariññeyyabhāvasabbhāvato, upādānakkhandhantogadhattā ca dukkhasaccasaṅgahaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“遍处”即遍处禅那。“三十二相”指三十二部分,以及以彼为所缘的禅那。“九有”指欲有等三种、想有等三种、一蕴有等三种,合为九有。“四禅”指未取所缘差别的四种色界禅那,或此即指果报禅那。在此,应知作为善法亲依止的渴爱,即是能令生起的“前渴爱”。而唯作法在其所在之处,即成为彼自体之因。显示巴利原文
Kasiṇānīti kasiṇajjhānāni. Dvattiṃsākārāti dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā, tadārammaṇajjhānāni ca. Nava bhavāti kāmabhavādayo tayo, saññībhavādayo tayo, ekavokārabhavādayo tayoti nava bhavā. Cattāri jhānānīti aggahitārammaṇavisesāni cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni, vipākajjhānānaṃ vā etaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Ettha ca kusaladhammānaṃ upanissayabhūtā taṇhā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhāti veditabbā. Kiriyadhammānaṃ pana yattha te tassa attabhāvassa kāraṇabhūtā.
所谓“已觉了”,是依所应觉了之法,如理觉了。因此,说为“由此”。因为从共相与别相,一一分别而觉了一切法,故如此说。如何说?即“正确地、自证觉了一切法故”,意思是:对于一切所知,以一切方式无颠倒地、由自己现等觉。由此,显示了不依他人教导、能以一切方式通达一切法、随欲而转的无碍智的证得——亦即一切知智的证得。显示巴利原文
Anubuddhoti bujjhitabbadhammassa anurūpato buddho. Tenāti tasmā. Yasmā sāmaññato, visesato ca ekekapaduddhārena sabbadhamme buddho, tasmā vuttaṃ. Kinti āha ‘‘sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā’’ti, sabbassapi ñeyyassa sabbākārato aviparītaṃ sayameva abhisambuddhattāti attho. Imināssa paropadesarahitassa sabbākārena sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthassa ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhavuttino anāvaraṇañāṇasaṅkhātassa sabbaññutaññāṇassa adhigamo dassito.
一切知智与无碍智难道不是相异的吗?否则,“六不共智是佛智”(《无碍解道·论母》1.73)的说法便会相违?并不相违,因为这是依所缘境与转起方式的差别,为了显示与其他智的不共之处,而将同一智说为两种。实际上,那唯一的智,因以无余的有为法、无为法及假名法为所缘,故为一切知智;而在此中,因无障碍、无执著地转起,故称为无碍智。如《无碍解道》所说:“知一切有为无为无余,故为一切知智;于彼无有障碍,故为无碍智”等(《无碍解道》1.119)。因此,二者在意义上并无差别,而且必然应如此理解。否则,一切知智与无碍智就会成为共通之智,且不以一切法为所缘。实际上,世尊之智没有丝毫障碍;若无碍智不以一切法为所缘,则于其不转起之处便有障碍存在,也就不能称为无碍了。或者,即便无碍智与一切知智是不同的,但此处,在一切处无碍而转的意义上,是以“无碍智”指称一切知智本身。而由证得此智,世尊才被称为“一切知者、一切见者、正等觉者”,并非仅仅是经由一次通达一切法。正如《无碍解道》(1.162)所说:“此乃诸佛世尊于菩提树下,与一切知智的获得同时现证。”显示巴利原文
Nanu ca sabbaññutaññāṇato aññaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ, aññathā ‘‘cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni buddhañāṇānī’’ti (paṭi. ma. mātikā 1.73) vacanaṃ virujjheyyāti? Na virujjhati, visayapavattibhedavasena aññehi asādhāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ ekasseva ñāṇassa dvidhā vuttattā. Ekameva hi taṃ ñāṇaṃ anavasesasaṅkhatāsaṅkhatasammutidhammavisayatāya sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha ca āvaraṇābhāvato nissaṅgacāramupādāya ‘‘anāvaraṇañāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Yathāha paṭisambhidāyaṃ ‘‘sabbaṃ saṅkhatamasaṅkhataṃ anavasesaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha āvaraṇaṃ natthīti anāvaraṇañāṇa’’ntiādi (paṭi. ma. 1.119). Tasmā natthi nesaṃ atthato bhedo, ekantena cetaṃ evamicchitabbaṃ. Aññathā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇānaṃ sādhāraṇatā, asabbadhammārammaṇatā ca āpajjeyya. Na hi bhagavato ñāṇassa aṇumattampi āvaraṇaṃ atthi, anāvaraṇañāṇassa ca asabbadhammārammaṇabhāve yattha taṃ na pavattati, tatthāvaraṇasabbhāvato anāvaraṇabhāvoyeva na siyā. Atha vā pana hotu aññameva anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇato, idha pana sabbattha appaṭihatavuttitāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti sabbaññutaññāṇameva adhippetaṃ. Tassa cādhigamena bhagavā ‘‘sabbaññū, sabbavidū, sammāsambuddho’’ti ca vuccati na sakiṃyeva sabbadhammāvabodhato. Tathā ca vuttaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.162) ‘‘vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ ‘‘buddho’’ti. Sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthañāṇasamadhigamena hi bhagavato santāne anavasesadhamme paṭivijjhituṃ samatthatā ahosīti.
于此有问:此智转起时,是于一切所缘境一次同时转起,还是次第转起?对此,若谓一次同时于一切境转起,那么过去、未来、现在、内、外等种种差别的有为法,以及无为法、假名法,若一时现前,则如同远观画布之人,不能分别了知;若如此,则如同修观者以“一切法无我”的无我相作观照时,一切法以未加分别的形态成为世尊智的所缘——这便有过失。那些说“诸佛之智于一切时,以一切所知法的住立自相为所缘,无有分别而转起,因此他们被称为‘一切见者’;如此,则‘行走时入定之龙象,站立时亦入定’这句话也得以善巧成立”的人,同样不能避免上述过失。而且,由于以住立自相为所缘,过去、未来及假名法在彼时并不存在,世尊之智便只能以一部分为所缘。因此,“智一次同时转起”并不合理。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – kiṃ panidaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattamānaṃ sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, udāhu kamenāti? Kiñcettha – yadi tāva sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, atītānāgatapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhādibhedabhinnānaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ, asaṅkhatasammutidhammānañca ekajjhaṃ upaṭṭhāne dūrato cittapaṭaṃ pekkhantassa viya paṭivibhāgenāvabodho na siyā, tathā ca sati ‘‘sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti vipassantānaṃ anattākārena viya sabbadhammā anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇassa visayā hontīti āpajjati. Yepi ‘‘sabbañeyyadhammānaṃ ṭhitalakkhaṇavisayaṃ vikapparahitaṃ sabbakālaṃ buddhānaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattati, tena te ‘sabbavidū’ti vuccanti, evañca katvā ‘caraṃ samāhito nāgo, tiṭṭhantopi samāhito’ti idampi vacanaṃ suvuttaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti, tesampi vuttadosānātivatti, ṭhitalakkhaṇārammaṇatāya ca atītānāgatasammutidhammānaṃ tadabhāvato ekadesavisayameva bhagavato ñāṇaṃ siyā. Tasmā sakiṃyeva ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti na yujjati.
若说智于一切境次第转起,这也不合理。因为对于依生类、地域、自性等,以及依方位、时间等而有种种差别的所知,当次第取时,由于所知无有边际,便不可能无余通达。至于那些人所说——“由于对义无欺诳,世尊现证所知的一部分后,以‘其余也是如此’的决定而确立,故为一切知者;且此智并非比量,因为无疑惑。世间的比量智则与疑惑相连”——他们的说法同样不合理。因为若非一切皆现量,就不可能通过对义无欺诳而现证所知的一部分后,以‘其余也是如此’的决定而确立。因为那所谓的‘其余’,并非现量。显示巴利原文
Atha kamena sabbasmiṃ visaye ñāṇaṃ pavattati? Evampi na yujjati. Na hi jātibhūmisabhāvādivasena, disādesakālādivasena ca anekabhedabhinne ñeyye kamena gayhamāne tassa anavasesapaṭivedho sambhavati, apariyantabhāvato ñeyyassa. Ye pana ‘‘atthassa avisaṃvādanato ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā ‘sesepi eva’nti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanena sabbaññū bhagavā, tañca ñāṇaṃ na anumānikaṃ saṃsayābhāvato. Saṃsayānubaddhaṃ hi loke anumānañāṇa’’nti vadanti, tesampi taṃ na yuttaṃ. Sabbassa hi appaccakkhabhāve atthāvisaṃvādanena ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā ‘‘sesepi eva’’nti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanassa asambhavato. Yañhi taṃ sesaṃ, taṃ appaccakkhanti.
若说那其余部分也是现量,则它就不成其为‘其余’了?这一切都无道理。何以故?因为这是不应思惟的领域。世尊曾说过:‘诸比丘,佛之境界不可思议,不应思惟。若思惟者,当得狂乱与苦恼。’(《增支部》4.77)此处的定论是:凡是世尊所欲了知的,无论是全部或一部分,其智皆于彼处无碍而转,故为现量;且由于无有散乱,常在三昧。若所欲知的全部并非其境,则其智便非随欲而转;而必然应如所说:‘一切法皆随世尊的转向、随欲、随作意、随心转起。’对于过去与未来之境,世尊之智也因不起推论、圣教量、思择的执取,故亦为现量。显示巴利原文
Atha tampi paccakkhaṃ, tassa sesabhāvo eva na siyāti? Sabbametaṃ akāraṇaṃ. Kasmā ? Avisayavicāraṇabhāvato. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘buddhavisayo, bhikkhave, acinteyyo na cintetabbo. Yo cinteyya, ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77). Idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ – yaṃkiñci bhagavatā ñātuṃ icchitaṃ sakalaṃ, ekadeso vā, tattha appaṭihatavuttitāya paccakkhato ñāṇaṃ pavattati, niccasamādhānañca vikkhepābhāvato. Ñātuṃ icchitassa ca sakalassa avisayabhāve tassa ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhavuttitā na siyā, ekanteneva sā icchitabbā ‘‘sabbe dhammā buddhassa bhagavato āvajjanappaṭibaddhā ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhā manasikārappaṭibaddhā cittuppādappaṭibaddhā’’ti vacanato. Atītānāgatavisayampi bhagavato ñāṇaṃ anumānāgamatakkaggahaṇavirahitattā paccakkhameva.
然而,在此情况下,难道不是当想要了知一切时,世尊的智就会因为一次性取全体为所缘,而以一种未作区分的形态生起,从而无法避免上述过失吗?并非如此,因为那个境界已被净化。佛陀的境界已被净化,故为不可思议。否则,若诸佛世尊的智与凡夫的智有相同的运作方式,便不会有不可思议性。因此,即使以一切法为所缘,此智也如同以单一法为所缘,在那些法已被善加确定的情况下生起——这正是此处的不可思议。正如所说:‘所知有多少,智就有多少;智有多少,所知就有多少。智以所知为边际,所知以智为边际。’(《大义释》69;《小义释·莫伽罗阇童子问义释》85;《无碍解道》3.5)如此,或以总括、或以分别、或以一时、或以次第,随其所欲,正确地、亲自地觉悟了一切法,故为正自觉者。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca etasmiṃ pakkhe yadā sakalaṃ ñātuṃ icchitaṃ, tadā sakiṃyeva sakalavisayatāya anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇaṃ pavatteyyāti vuttadosānātivattiyevāti? Na, tassa visodhitattā. Visodhito hi so buddhavisayo acinteyyoti. Aññathā pacurajanañāṇasamānavuttitāya buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ ñāṇassa acinteyyatā na siyā. Tasmā sakaladhammārammaṇampi taṃ ekadhammārammaṇaṃ viya suvavatthāpiteyeva te dhamme katvā pavattatīti idamettha acinteyyaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ. Ñeyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ ñeyya’’nti (mahāni. 69; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5). Evamekajjhaṃ, visuṃ, sakiṃ, kamena vā icchānurūpaṃ sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho.
133 关于“明”:此处,“明”意为“知”,即如实地获得。或以刺破对立面之义称为“明”,即破除黑暗蕴等之义。也正因此,以令自所缘被了知之义,亦是“明”。“具足”即具有、圆满、无缺之义。当知,诸经中此处彼处所提到的三明、八明,是随顺应度者的意乐而说。七种正法,即信、惭、愧、多闻、精进、念与慧。关于这些,有言:“在此,比丘具足信心……”等(增支部 10.11)。四禅,即任何四种色界禅那。显示巴利原文
133.Vijjāhīti ettha vindiyaṃ vindatīti vijjā, yāthāvato upalabbhatīti attho. Attano vā paṭipakkhassa vijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā, tamokkhandhādikassa padālanaṭṭhenāti attho. Tato eva attano visayassa viditakaraṇaṭṭhenapi vijjā. Sampannattāti samannāgatattā, paripuṇṇattā vā, avikalattāti attho. Tissannaṃ, aṭṭhannaṃ ca vijjānaṃ tattha tattha sutte gahaṇaṃ vineyyajjhāsayavasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Satta saddhammā nāma saddhā hirī ottappaṃ bāhusaccaṃ vīriyaṃ sati paññā ca. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘idha bhikkhu saddho hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 10.11). Cattāri jhānānīti yāni kānici cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni.
然而,为何在此处,戒等恰好十五种被称为“行”呢?为回应这一问难,说:“正是这些……”等。由此说明,它们为三学所摄,于趣向涅槃中,是决定性的资具。接着,为显示成立此义的圣教,说:“如说……”等。“世尊”等,是作为对前述义理的结语而说。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha sīlādayo pannaraseva ‘‘caraṇa’’nti vuttāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘imeyeva hī’’tiādi . Tena tesaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahato nibbānupagamane ekaṃsato sādhanabhāvamāha. Idāni tadatthasādhanāya āgamaṃ dassento ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādimāha. Bhagavātiādi vuttassevatthassa nigamanavasena vuttaṃ.
难道这种明行具足在声闻弟子中也能获得吗?虽然能获得,却并非如世尊那般。为显示此差别,说:“其中,明具足……”等。悲梵住属于行法,而它在此时达到广大境界,是共通之法,故说:“行具足圆满大悲而住。”正如令众生远离无益、致力有益,无慧则不可能;同样,了知众生何益何损,若无导师之悲亦不可能。因此,二者在各自情形下,各有其用。然而,为显示于某处某者具有主导性,说:“他由于一切知性……”等。此处,“如同那明行具足者”的意思是:如同其他明行具足者一样,由此显示,这正是明行具足者不共的行持。而为表明,导师的这种明行具足——由于教法的出离性——正是声闻弟子们正行的唯一原因,因此说:“他的……”等。这很容易理解。显示巴利原文
Nanu cāyaṃ vijjācaraṇasampadā sāvakesupi labbhatīti? Kiñcāpi labbhati, na pana tathā, yathā bhagavatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha vijjāsampadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Caraṇadhammapariyāpannattā karuṇābrahmavihārassa, so cettha mahaggatabhāvappattā sādhāraṇabhāvoti āha ‘‘caraṇasampadā mahākāruṇikataṃ pūretvā ṭhitā’’ti. Yathā sattānaṃ anatthaṃ parivajjetvā atthe niyojanaṃ paññāya vinā na hoti, evaṃ nesaṃ atthānatthajānanaṃ satthu karuṇāya vinā na hotīti ubhayampi ubhayattha sakiccakameva siyā. Yattha pana yassā padhānabhāvo, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so sabbaññutāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā taṃ vijjācaraṇasampannoti yathā aññopi vijjācaraṇasampanno, tena vijjācaraṇasampannassevāyaṃ āveṇikā paṭipattīti dasseti. Sā panāyaṃ satthu vijjācaraṇasampadā sāsanassa niyyānikatāya sāvakānaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā ekantakāraṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tenassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyameva.
在此,由明具足彰显了导师智慧之广大,由行具足彰显了悲悯之广大。其中,依智慧,世尊成就法王之位;依悲悯,施予正法之分享。依智慧,于轮回之苦生厌离;依悲悯,于轮回之苦能堪忍。依智慧,遍知他人之苦;依悲悯,着手除遣他人之苦。依智慧,面向般涅槃;依悲悯,证得般涅槃。依智慧,自度;依悲悯,度他。依智慧,成就佛果;依悲悯,成就佛行。或复,依悲悯,在菩萨地时趋向轮回;依智慧,于轮回中不乐著。同样,依悲悯,不损害他人;依智慧,不为他人所畏惧。依悲悯,守护他人时守护自己;依智慧,守护自己时守护他人。同样,依悲悯,不折磨他人;依智慧,不折磨自己。由此,在四种人——为自利而行者等——之中,成就了第四种人。同样,依悲悯,成为世间之依怙;依智慧,成为自己之依怙。依悲悯,其有谦下之相;依智慧,无高慢之相。同样,依悲悯而对一切众生所起的摄受,因有智慧随行,故非于一切处心皆离染;依智慧而于一切法心离染,因有悲悯随行,故非不转起摄受一切众生。正如世尊的悲悯远离了爱著与忧恼,智慧也远离了我想与我所想,应当了知,由此明行具足所彰显的、相互净化、至极清净的功德之殊胜。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca vijjāsampadāya satthu paññāmahattaṃ pakāsitaṃ hoti, caraṇasampadāya karuṇāmahattaṃ. Tesu paññāya bhagavato dhammarajjappatti, karuṇāya dhammasaṃvibhāgo. Paññāya saṃsāradukkhanibbidā, karuṇāya saṃsāradukkhasahanaṃ. Paññāya paradukkhaparijānanaṃ, karuṇāya paradukkhapatikārārambho. Paññāya parinibbānābhimukhabhāvo, karuṇāya tadadhigamo. Paññāya sayaṃ taraṇaṃ, karuṇāya paresaṃ tāraṇaṃ. Paññāya buddhabhāvasiddhi, karuṇāya buddhakiccasiddhi. Karuṇāya vā bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ saṃsārābhimukhabhāvo, paññāya tattha anabhirati. Tathā karuṇāya paresaṃ abhiṃsāpanaṃ , paññāya sayaṃ parehi abhāyanaṃ. Karuṇāya paraṃ rakkhanto attānaṃ rakkhati, paññāya attānaṃ rakkhanto paraṃ rakkhati. Tathā karuṇāya aparantapo, paññāya anattantapo. Tena attahitāya paṭipannādīsu catūsu puggalesu catutthapuggalabhāvo siddho hoti. Tathā karuṇāya lokanāthatā, paññāya attanāthatā. Karuṇāya cassa ninnatābhāvo, paññāya unnamābhāvo. Tathā karuṇāya sabbasattesu janitānuggaho paññānugatattā na ca na sabbattha virattacitto, paññāya sabbadhammesu virattacitto karuṇānugatattā na ca na sabbasattānuggahāya pavatto. Yathā hi karuṇā bhagavato sinehasokavirahitā, evaṃ paññā ahaṃkāramamaṃkāravinimuttāti aññamaññavisodhitā paramavisuddhā guṇavisesā vijjācaraṇasampadāhi pakāsitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
134 134. 因为“去”也被称为“行”,如在“已去、站立”等中(长部 1.214; 2.376)。美好的,即善的。善的状态是由于清净,清净是由于断除了过失,所以说“清净无过”。而所谓的“行”有多种,为了显示此处所指的“行”,说:“圣道”。因为它作为涅槃的去处、证得,故被称为“已去”、“行”。现在,为了显示执取它的理由,说:“因此,这个……”等。安稳之处,即涅槃。无滞著:由于没有障碍,即使在善趣的行走中也无滞著、不形成执著,更不必说在其他地方了。或者,由于在一座之上,依速疾神通就获得了四道,故无滞著、无挂碍地去了。那种在行走时能去除一切无益、带来一切无上成就的行,才名为美好。而世尊以此而行,所以说:“如此,由于美好地行,故为善逝”,将“善”字理解为美好的意思。显示巴利原文
134.Gamanampi hi gatanti vuccati ‘‘gate ṭhite’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.214; 2.376). Sobhananti subhaṃ. Subhabhāvo visuddhatāya, visuddhatā dosavigamenāti āha ‘‘parisuddhamanavajja’’nti. Gamanañca nāma bahuvidhanti idhādhippetaṃ gamanaṃ dassento ‘‘ariyamaggo’’ti āha. So hi nibbānassa gati adhigamoti katvā ‘‘gataṃ, gamana’’nti ca vuccati. Idāni tasseva gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tena hesā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Khemaṃ disanti nibbānaṃ. Asajjamānoti paripanthābhāvena sugatigamanepi asajjanto saṅgaṃ akaronto, pageva itarattha. Atha vā ekāsane nisīditvā khippabhiññāvaseneva catunnampi maggānaṃ paṭiladdhabhāvato asajjamāno asajjanto gato. Yaṃ gamanaṃ gacchanto sabbamanatthaṃ apaharati, sabbañca anuttaraṃ sampattiṃ āvahati, tadeva sobhanaṃ nāma. Tena ca bhagavā gatoti āha ‘‘iti sobhanagamanattā sugato’’ti sobhanattho su-saddoti katvā.
由于丑陋的、诸行相续的苦已不存在,故为毕竟之乐,因此从究竟意义上,无为界即名为美好,所以说“他已到达那美好之处,即不死、涅槃”。因此世尊说:“涅槃是至上之乐”(中部·2.215;法句203-204)。“正”即善妙。而善妙的行走,即不被对立面所制伏的行走,故说“已断烦恼,不再回还”。这是达到顶点的正行,而成就此正行的来行之道,本身亦是正行。为了显示世尊在此意义上亦是善逝,故说“或已正行”等。以正行道,即为了证得正等觉的无颠倒行道。“唯作一切世间之利益安乐”,由此显示大菩提道,总摄而言,乃是以恒时带来一切众生利益安乐的方式而转起。“不趋近常见、断见两个极端而行”,由此显示缘起之行道;“不趋近欲乐、自我折磨两个极端而行”,由此显示圣道之行道。显示巴利原文
Asundarānaṃ dukkhānaṃ saṅkhārappavattīnaṃ abhāvato accantasukhattā ekantato sundaraṃ nāma asaṅkhatā dhātūti āha ‘‘sundarañcesa ṭhānaṃ gato amataṃ nibbāna’’nti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘nibbānaṃ paramaṃ sukha’’nti (ma. ni. 2.215; dha. pa. 203-204). Sammāti suṭṭhu. Suṭṭhu gamanañca nāma paṭipakkhena anabhibhūtassa gamananti āha ‘‘pahīne kilese puna apaccāgacchanto’’ti. Idañca sikhāppattaṃ sammāgamanaṃ, yāya āgamanīyapaṭipadāya siddhaṃ, sāpi sammāgamanamevāti evampi bhagavā sugatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘sammā vā gato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sammāpaṭipattiyāti sammāsambodhiyā sampāpane aviparītapaṭipattiyā. ‘‘Sabbalokassa hitasukhameva karonto’’ti etena mahābodhiyā paṭipadā avibhāgena sabbasattānaṃ sabbadā hitasukhāvahabhāveneva pavattatīti dasseti. ‘‘Sassataṃ ucchedanti ime ante anupagacchanto gato’’ti etena paṭiccasamuppādagatiṃ dasseti. ‘‘Kāmasukhaṃ attakilamathanti ime anupagacchanto gato’’ti etena ariyamaggagatiṃ dasseti.
此处(tatrāti)是依格,指在适当的场合,对于应成就、应证成之事,唯说适当之语。不实(abhūtaṃ),即不真实之义。因为言语的不实或真实,是以义理为入口的。不真(atacchaṃ),是它的同义词。或者,不实指不存在、没有的东西;不真指非如此样貌、以别样存在的东西。无义相应(anatthasañhitaṃ),即与现世或来世的无义相应,带来无义。非义即是无义,是义的敌对与无有,与此相应,即离间语、杂秽语。应知此处包含了四种语恶行。其中,第一种语,应视为对持戒者说“破戒者”,对非旃陀罗等说“旃陀罗”等。第二种语,是对破戒者以非调伏的方式说“破戒者”,对旃陀罗等说“旃陀罗”等。第三种语,是阐明地狱众生等地狱众生状态的话,如“提婆达多是堕恶趣者、地狱众生”等(律藏·小品348)。第四种语,是迷惑世间的言论,如“依吠陀所制定的祭祀仪规而行杀生等,能带来善趣”。第五种语,是以真实事进行离间等的话。第六种语,应知是在适当、合宜的场合所说的布施、持戒等话。如此,因为善妙地说(sammā gadattā),即如所说,避免不实等,而说真实、真确、义利相应、可爱、可意,因此是善妙地说,故为善逝(sugato),将da音变为ta音。即使只是入耳,世尊的任何话语,即使对某人而言不可爱,也因能成就义利、带来世间的利益安乐,而成为可爱、可意。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti yuttaṭṭhāne yuttasseva bhāsane nipphādetabbe, sādhetabbe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Abhūtanti abhūtatthaṃ. Atthamukhena hi vācāya abhūtatā, bhūtatā vā. Atacchanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Abhūtanti vā asantaṃ avijjamānaṃ. Atacchanti atathākāraṃ aññathāsantaṃ. Anatthasañhitanti diṭṭhadhammikena, samparāyikena vā anatthena sañhitaṃ, anatthāvahaṃ. Na atthoti anattho, atthassa paṭipakkho, abhāvo ca, tena sañhitaṃ, pisuṇavācaṃ, samphappalāpañcāti attho. Evamettha catubbidhassāpi vacīduccaritassa saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca paṭhamā vācā sīlavantaṃ ‘‘dussīlo’’ti, acaṇḍālādimeva ‘‘caṇḍālo’’tiādinā bhāsamānassa daṭṭhabbā. Dutiyā dussīlaṃ ‘‘dussīlo’’ti, caṇḍālādimeva ‘‘caṇḍālo’’tiādinā avinayena bhāsamānassa. Tatiyā nerayikādikassa nerayikādibhāvavibhāvanīkathā yathā ‘‘āpāyiko devadatto nerayiko’’tiādikā (cūḷava. 348). Catutthī ‘‘vedavihitena yaññavidhinā pāṇātipātādikataṃ sugatiṃ āvahatī’’ti lokassa byāmohanakathā. Pañcamī bhūtena pesuññūpasaṃhārādikathā. Chaṭṭhā yuttappattaṭṭhāne pavattitā dānasīlādikathā veditabbā. Evaṃ sammā gadattāti yathāvuttaṃ abhūtādiṃ vajjetvā bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasañhitaṃ piyaṃ manāpaṃ tato eva sammā suṭṭhu gadanato sugato da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā. Āpāthagamanamattena kassaci appiyampi hi bhagavato vacanaṃ piyaṃ manāpameva atthasiddhiyā lokassa hitasukhāvahattā.
再者,拥有美好、善妙的行走,故为善逝(sugato)。因为世尊前往应调伏者之处,唯是为了成就他们的利益安乐,所以是美好、吉祥的。同样,其身行,由于具足相好庄严之身,远离了疾速、迟缓、蹒跚、拖曳、挤压、蜷缩、弯曲、混乱等过失,如王鹅、象王、兽王般优雅而行,是美好的;其智行,具足广大、清净、慈悲、念、精进等功德殊胜,从发愿直至大菩提,因无有过失,且能带来众生的利益安乐,故也是美好的。或者,以自然智,通过遍知现观而遍知一切世间,已正行、已通达,故为善逝。同样,通过断现观而断除世间集,令其达到不再生起的法性,已正行、已超越,故为善逝。通过证现观而证得世间灭即涅槃,已正行、已证得,故为善逝。通过修现观而正行于趣向世间灭之道,已正行、已行道,故为善逝。同样,此天界世间等所见的、所闻的、所感的、所识的、所得的、所寻求的、心意所随转的一切,世尊都如掌中庵摩罗果般,以现量正行而了知,故为善逝。显示巴利原文
Apica sobhanaṃ gataṃ gamanaṃ etassāti sugato. Bhagavato hi veneyyajanupasaṅkamanaṃ ekantena tesaṃ hitasukhanipphādanato sobhanaṃ bhaddakaṃ . Tathā lakkhaṇānubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitarūpakāyatāya dutavilambitakhalitānukaḍḍhananippīḷanukkuṭikakuṭilākulatādidosarahitavilāsitarājahaṃsavasabhavāraṇamigarājagamanaṃ kāyagamanaṃ, ñāṇagamanañca vipulanimmalakaruṇāsativīriyādiguṇavisesasahitaṃ abhinīhārato yāva mahābodhi anavajjatāya, sattānaṃ hitasukhāvahatāya ca sobhanameva. Atha vā sayambhūñāṇena sakalampi lokaṃ pariññābhisamayavasena parijānanto sammā gato avagatoti sugato. Tathā lokasamudayaṃ pahānābhisamayavasena pajahanto anuppattidhammataṃ āpādento sammā gato atītoti sugato. Lokanirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena sammā gato adhigatoti sugato. Lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ bhāvanābhisamayavasena sammā gato paṭipannoti sugato. Tathā yaṃ imassa sadevakassa lokassa diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, sabbaṃ taṃ hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya sammā paccakkhato gato abbhaññāsīti sugato.
135 “以一切方式”(sabbathā),即以所有方式。任何世间,如何应被了知,即那样地去知。为了显示那些方式,所以说“从自性上”等。其中,“从自性上”,即从苦的自性上。因为一切世间皆以苦为自性。如所说:“略言之,五取蕴是苦”(大品14;长部2.387)。“从集上”,即从世间由此而集起之处,即从渴爱等。“从灭上”,即从世间于此灭尽之处,即从离行。“从灭之道上”,即从以此方法应证得灭之处,即从圣道,因为除此之外,别无其他方式。显示巴利原文
135.Sabbathāti sabbappakārena. Yo yo loko yathā yathā veditabbo, tathā tathā. Te pana pakāre dassetuṃ ‘‘sabhāvato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabhāvatoti dukkhasabhāvato. Sabbo hi loko dukkhasabhāvo. Yathāha ‘‘saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti (mahāva. 14; dī. ni. 2.387). Samudayatoti yato so samudeti, tato taṇhādito. Nirodhatoti yattha so nirujjhati, tato visaṅkhārato. Nirodhūpāyatoti yena vidhinā so nirodho pattabbo, tato ariyamaggato, ito aññassa pakārassa abhāvā.
如是,说了“以一切方式了知世间”之后,为显示证成此义的经文,而说“贤友,于此处……”等。其中,以“不生”等直接否定了生等;又以“不死、不结生”二句,否定了前后次第的死与结生。又有些人说:“‘不生’等是就胎生而言,其余的则是就化生而言。”“彼”(taṃ)即远离生等之处。“以行走”(gamanena)即以足步行。“应知”(ñāteyyaṃ)即应被了知。或读作“ñātāya”,意为“此是已知者”,即“此求涅槃者”。显示巴利原文
Iti ‘‘sabbathā lokaṃ avedī’’ti vatvā tadatthasādhakaṃ suttaṃ dassento ‘‘yattha kho āvuso’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘na jāyatī’’tiādinā ujukaṃ jātiādīni paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘na cavati na upapajjatī’’ti padadvayena aparāparaṃ cavanupapajjanāni paṭikkhipati. Keci pana ‘‘na jāyatītiādi gabbhaseyyakavasena vuttaṃ, itaraṃ opapātikavasenā’’ti vadanti. Tanti jātiādirahitaṃ. Gamanenāti padasā gamanena. Ñāteyyanti jānitabbaṃ. ‘‘Ñātāya’’nti vā pāṭho, ñātā ayaṃ nibbānatthikoti adhippāyo.
纵使以步行前往,也无法了知、见到或到达世间之边。然而,在一个有限、被划定的范围内,我施设它并展示它——为了显示此义,他说了“复次……”等语。其中,“有想者”指具有想者,故即有命者、有识者。而对于无识者,则无法在仅由时节所生色的集合上施设,这是他的用意。“世间”指蕴等世间。“世间灭”指该世间的灭尽,或即是涅槃。因为对于某些人来说,涅槃虽无方位可得,但依其成就,从譬喻上和方位上仍可指示,例如“眼是世间中可爱、可意的,对此贪爱在被断除时即断除,在被灭尽时即灭尽”(《长部》2.401;《中部》1.134;《分别论》204)。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ pādagamanena gantvā lokassantaṃ ñātuṃ, daṭṭhuṃ, pattuṃ vā na sakkā, apica parimitaparicchinnaṭṭhāne taṃ paññāpetvā dassemīti dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sasaññimhīti saññāsahite. Tato eva samanake saviññāṇake. Aviññāṇake pana utusamuṭṭhānarūpasamudāyamatte paññāpetuṃ na sakkāti adhippāyo. Lokanti khandhādilokaṃ. Lokanirodhanti tassa lokassa nirujjhanaṃ, nibbānameva vā. Adesampi hi taṃ yesaṃ nirodho, tesaṃ vasena upacārato, desatopi niddisīyati yathā ‘‘cakkhuṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.401; ma. ni. 1.134; vibha. 204).
“以行”(gamanena)指通常的步行。“世间尽头”指行世间的尽头,即作为边际之因的涅槃。“任何时候”指无论何时。“未到达”指未以最上道证得。“解脱”即解脱、出离。“因此”是说,因为未到达世间尽头,就没有从轮回苦中的解脱。“have”不过是一个虚词。“世间解”指从自性等方面了知一切世间者。“善慧”指具有美妙智慧者。“达世间边者”指以遍知通达了知世间,以断除通达达到世间边际者。由于道梵行住已圆满,故为“已住梵行者”。由于一切烦恼已寂灭,或四圣谛法已通达,故为“寂灭者”。他对世间不抱期望、无所希求。如同对此世间,对其他世间亦因无结生之故而如此。显示巴利原文
Gamanenāti pākatikagamanena. Lokassantoti saṅkhāralokassa anto antakiriyāhetubhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ. Kudācananti kadācipi. Apatvāti aggamaggena anadhigantvā. Pamocananti pamutti nissaraṇaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā lokassantaṃ apatvā vaṭṭadukkhato mutti natthi, tasmā. Haveti nipātamattaṃ. Lokavidūti sabhāvādito sabbaṃ lokaṃ jānanto. Sumedhoti sundarapañño. Lokantagūti pariññābhisamayena lokaṃ viditvā pahānābhisamayena lokantagū. Maggabrahmacariyavāsassa pariniṭṭhitattā vusitabrahmacariyo. Sabbesaṃ kilesānaṃ samitattā, catusaccadhammānaṃ vā abhisamitattā samitāvī. Nāsīsati na pattheti. Yathā imaṃ lokaṃ, evaṃ parañca lokaṃ appaṭisandhikattā.
136 136. 如此,世间解性虽已依其自性被无余显示,但世间仅被部分提及,为无余显示它而说“再者,有三种世间”等。其中,根所系诸蕴的集合与相续是有情世间。因对色等贪著,故称“有情”;于此中,善、恶及其异熟被称为世间,故称“世间”。非根所系色等的集合与相续是器世间;于此中,动与不动之物被称为世间,且它是它们的处所,故称“世间”。因为是它们的依止,它也称作“器世间”。此二者中的诸蕴皆是行世间,因为它们由缘造作,且坏灭、崩解。“依食而住”即依缘而住,亦即依缘而转。此处“食”是缘的意思,如“此食是为未生之欲贪的生起……”(《相应部》5.232)等。如此,以“一切有情”一语,无想有情也被包含其中。然而,此依食而住性,严格而言是行法,而非有情法,因此说:“在引述‘依食而住’之处,应知是行世间”。显示巴利原文
136. Evaṃ yadipi lokavidutā anavasesato dassitā sabhāvato dassitattā, loko pana ekadeseneva vuttoti taṃ anavasesato dassetuṃ ‘‘apica tayo lokā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha indriyabaddhānaṃ khandhānaṃ samūho, santāno ca sattaloko. Rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya satto, lokīyanti ettha kusalākusalaṃ, tabbipāko cāti lokoti. Anindriyabaddhānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ samūho, santāno ca okāsaloko lokiyanti ettha tasā, thāvarā ca, tesañca okāsabhūtoti. Tadādhāratāya hesa ‘‘bhājanaloko’’tipi vuccati. Ubhayepi khandhā saṅkhāraloko paccayehi saṅkharīyanti, lujjanti palujjanti cāti. Āhāraṭṭhitikāti paccayaṭṭhitikā, paccayāyattavuttikāti attho. Paccayattho hettha āhāra-saddo ‘‘ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa uppādāyā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.232) viya. Evaṃ hi ‘‘sabbe sattā’’ti iminā asaññasattāpi pariggahitā honti. Sā panāyaṃ āhāraṭṭhitikatā nippariyāyato saṅkhāradhammo, na sattadhammoti āha ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikāti āgataṭṭhāne saṅkhāraloko veditabbo’’ti.
如果这样,“一切有情”一语如何成立?这是以补特伽罗为安立的教说,故无过失。正如他处所说:“比丘们,若比丘于一法正确地厌离、正确地离染、正确地解脱、正确地见边际、正确地通达义理,即于此现法成为终止苦者。于哪一法?‘一切有情依食而住’。”(《增支部》10.27)对于持邪见者,大多以有情为所缘,而非以行为所缘,依常见等构想“我、世间”,因此说:“在‘世间是常’或‘世间是非常’被引述之处,应知是有情世间”。显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ ‘‘sabbe sattā’’ti idaṃ kathanti? Puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanāti nāyaṃ doso. Yathā aññatthāpi ‘‘ekadhamme, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sammā nibbindamāno sammā virajjamāno sammā vimuccamāno sammā pariyantadassāvī sammadatthaṃ abhisamecca diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro hoti. Katamasmiṃ ekadhamme? Sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti (a. ni. 10.27). Diṭṭhigatikānaṃ sassatādivasena ‘‘attā, loko’’ti ca parikappanā yebhuyyena sattavisayā, na saṅkhāravisayāti āha ‘‘sassato lokoti vā asassato lokoti vā āgataṭṭhāne sattaloko veditabbo’’ti.
“日月所运行之处”指日月在其中回转、周行的范围。“它们照耀方向,焕发光明”指因日月的周行,诸方变得明亮照耀。“如此千重世间”指如此千种的器世间,即一千世间界。“或读作‘tāva sahassavā’”。显示巴利原文
Yāvatā candimasūriyā pariharantīti yattake ṭhāne candimasūriyā parivattanti paribbhamanti. Disā bhanti virocamānāti tesaṃ paribbhamaneneva tā disā pabhassarā hutvā virocanti. Tāva sahassadhā lokoti tattakaṃ sahassappakāro okāsaloko, sahassalokadhātuyoti attho. ‘‘Tāva sahassavā’’ti vā pāṭho.
“此亦”即指这三类世间。因为世尊是一切方面都已了知,所以这里作此关联。“一种世间”:如“一切有情依食而住”这句以补特伽罗为安立的教导,说明了诸行皆依缘而转;由此,以诸行为体的世间便是一种、一类,因为并无其他类别存在。“二种世间”等也应依此理类推。在这里,以“名”一词故,未包含涅槃,因为涅槃并非世间的自性。若问:在那“依食而住”的教导中,依缘而转的特性难道不也使道果等诸法成为世间了吗?答曰:不成为,因为这里所说的“世间”是指应被遍知的苦谛诸法。或者,凡是被“坏灭法、崩解”所执取的对象,它即非世间;因此,不被此执取的出世间法便不具世间性。作为取著所缘的蕴即是取蕴。十处则指十种色处。显示巴利原文
Tampīti taṃ tividhampi lokaṃ. Tathā hissa sabbathāpi viditoti sambandho. Eko lokoti ‘‘sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti yāya puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya sabbesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ paccayāyattavuttitā vuttā, tāya sabbo saṅkhāraloko eko ekavidho pakārantarassa abhāvato. Dve lokātiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Nāma-ggahaṇena cettha nibbānassa aggahaṇaṃ, tassa alokasabhāvattā. Nanu ca ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti ettha paccayāyattavuttitāya maggaphaladhammānampi lokatā āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati, pariññeyyānaṃ dukkhasaccadhammānaṃ idha ‘‘loko’’ti adhippetattā. Atha vā ‘‘na lujjati na palujjatī’’ti yo gahito tathā na hoti, so lokoti taṃgahaṇarahitānaṃ lokuttarānaṃ natthi lokatā. Upādānānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā upādānakkhandhā. Dasāyatanānīti dasa rūpāyatanāni.
在此,“依食而住”即依缘而转的表述,揭示了诸行的无常性。而依此无常性,根据“凡无常者皆是苦,凡苦者皆是无我”(《相应部》3.15)的教示,苦性与无我性也得以阐明,由此,三共相便全部含摄了。“名”指四种非色蕴,在意义上即是触等心所。“色”指四大种与所造色,在意义上即地等元素。如此,从自相上,诸行已无有遗漏地被含摄;而通过含摄诸行,它们之间的差别——善、不善等及因、果等——也都被一并含摄。因此说:“如此,此行世间也于一切方面被了知了”。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti paccayāyattavuttitāvacanena saṅkhārānaṃ aniccatā. Tāya ca ‘‘yadaniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ, tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) vacanato dukkhānattatā ca pakāsitā hontīti tīṇipi sāmaññalakkhaṇāni gahitāni. Nāmanti cattāro arūpino khandhā, te ca atthato phassādayo. Rūpanti bhūtupādāyarūpāni, tāni ca atthato pathavīādayoti aviseseneva salakkhaṇato saṅkhārā gahitā. Taggahaṇeneva ye tesaṃ visesā kusalādayo, hetuādayo ca, tepi gahitā eva hontīti āha ‘‘iti ayaṃ saṅkhāralokopi sabbathā vidito’’ti.
心依凭某处而安住,该处即被称为‘栖所’,犹如野兽的栖身处。譬如,野兽外出觅食后,仍会回到那片丛林深处并睡卧其中,那片丛林就是它的栖身之所;同样地,心纵然游荡各处,终究会回到并安止于某处,那处所便被称为心的‘栖所’。此栖所依常见等,可分为四种。正如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Āgamma cittaṃ seti etthāti āsayo migāsayo viya. Yathā migo gocarāya gantvā paccāgantvā tattheva vanagahane sayatīti so tassa āsayo, evaṃ aññathā pavattitvāpi cittaṃ āgamma yattha seti, so tassa āsayoti vuccati. So pana sassatadiṭṭhiādivasena catubbidho. Vuttañca –
‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhi ca, khanti cevānulomikā; Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaddita’’nti.
于此,由于一切见皆含摄于常见与断见之中,故一切堕于见处的众生,无不依止此二种见。正如所说:“迦旃延,此世间多数依止于二种见:存在与不存在。”(相应部2.15)所谓“存在”,即执取常见;所谓“不存在”,即执取断见。以上是轮回中凡夫的依止。而出离世间之清净众生,则有随顺忍与如实智二种依止。显示巴利原文
Tattha sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ sassatucchedadiṭṭhīhi saṅgahitattā sabbepi diṭṭhigatikā sattā imā eva dve diṭṭhiyo sannissitā. Yathāha ‘‘dvayanissito khvāyaṃ, kaccāna, loko yebhuyyena atthitañca natthitañcā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.15). Atthitāti hi sassataggāho adhippeto, natthitāti ucchedaggāho. Ayaṃ tāva vaṭṭanissitānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ āsayo. Vivaṭṭanissitānaṃ pana suddhasattānaṃ anulomikā khanti, yathābhūtañāṇanti duvidho āsayo.
“了知依止”:即了知众生的四种依止。在了知时,即便在他们那些邪见与智慧不转起的刹那,他也能了知。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Āsayaṃ jānātīti catubbidhampi sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānāti. Jānanto ca tesaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ, tesañca ñāṇānaṃ appavattikkhaṇepi jānāti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“即使他正在享受欲乐,也能了知:‘此人以欲为极重,依止于欲,心倾向于欲’;即使他正在享受欲乐,也能了知:‘此人以出离为极重,依止于出离,心倾向于出离。’(《无碍解道》1.113)”显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo kāmagaruko kāmāsayo kāmādhimutto’ti, kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo nekkhammagaruko nekkhammāsayo nekkhammādhimutto’ti’’ādi (paṭi. ma. 1.113).
因未被断除,随逐眠伏于相续中,故称“随眠”;其义为:得到适当的因缘即生起。以此显示它们于因缘具足时生起的可能性。未断的烦恼,得缘即生。那么,哪些是随眠呢?贪等七种未来烦恼,以及过去、现在的烦恼,因其本质相同,亦得此称。诸法的本质,并不会因时间的差异而有所变化。他了知此七种随眠在一切众生的相续中,以或优或劣的方式转起。显示巴利原文
Appahīnabhāvena santāne anu anu sayantīti anusayā, anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjantīti attho. Etena nesaṃ kāraṇalābhe uppajjanārahataṃ dasseti. Appahīnā hi kilesā kāraṇalābhe sati uppajjanti. Ke pana te? Rāgādayo satta anāgatā kilesā, atītā, paccuppannā ca taṃsabhāvattā tathā vuccanti. Na hi dhammānaṃ kālabhedena sabhāvabhedo atthi. Taṃ sattavidhaṃ anusayaṃ tassa tassa sattassa santāne paroparabhāvena pavattamānaṃ jānāti.
“行”是指善行与恶行,此义在《分别论》(分别论814, 817)的“行”解说中已有阐述。或者,“行”应被理解为“习性”。这些习性以贪、嗔、痴、信、慧、寻为六种根本习性,其间的内部差别无量,而依接触方式的差别,则有六十三种。他(佛陀)从自性、杂染与清净、生起、果报、等流等方面了知此行。显示巴利原文
Caritanti sucaritaduccaritaṃ. Taṃ hi vibhaṅge (vibha. 814, 817) caritaniddese niddiṭṭhaṃ. Atha vā caritanti cariyā veditabbā. Tā pana rāgadosamohasaddhābuddhivitakkavasena cha mūlacariyā, tāsaṃ apariyanto antarabhedo, saṃsaggabhedo pana tesaṭṭhividho. Taṃ caritaṃ sabhāvato saṃkilesavodānato samuṭṭhānato phalato nissandatoti evamādinā pakārena jānāti.
“意乐”即意乐界,它有两种:低劣的意乐和殊胜的意乐。具有低劣意乐的众生只亲近低劣意乐者,具有殊胜意乐的众生只亲近殊胜意乐者。此意乐界,其本质即为意乐,也就是意向。他(佛陀)了知此意乐:“此人的意乐低劣,此人的意乐殊胜”,并能进一步了知:“此人的意乐是柔和的,此人的意乐更为柔和,此人的意乐最为柔和”等等。因为,如同根有利钝,应知意乐也有相应的利钝差别。此即《迷惑冰消》(分别论注818, 820)中所说:“此处再次提及意乐,是为了显示众生的根性利钝,尽管前文已经论述。”显示巴利原文
Adhimutti ajjhāsayadhātu. Sā duvidhā hīnādhimutti paṇītādhimuttīti. Yāya hīnādhimuttikā sattā hīnādhimuttikeyeva sevanti, paṇītādhimuttikā ca paṇītādhimuttikeyeva. Sā ajjhāsayadhātu ajjhāsayasabhāvo adhimutti. Taṃ adhimuttiṃ jānāti ‘‘imassa adhimutti hīnā, imassa paṇītā’’ti, tatthāpi ‘‘imassa mudu, imassa mudutarā, imassa mudutamā’’tiādinā. Indriyānaṃ hi tikkhamudubhāvādinā yathārahaṃ adhimuttiyā tikkhamudubhāvādiko veditabbo. Tathā hi vuttaṃ sammohavinodanīyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 818, 820) ‘‘heṭṭhā gahitāpi adhimutti idha sattānaṃ tikkhindriyamudindriyabhāvadassanatthaṃ puna gahitā’’ti.
“尘少”是指这些众生眼中的尘垢微少,故称“尘少”;也指他们智慧之眼中的尘垢微少,故称“尘少”。那些仅有随眠贪等尘垢的众生,是“尘少”者。至于“尘多”,也可用同样的方法理解:那些具有增盛贪等尘垢的众生,是“尘多”者。显示巴利原文
Apparajaṃ akkhaṃ etesanti apparajakkhā, appaṃ vā rajaṃ paññāmaye akkhimhi etesanti apparajakkhā, anussadarāgādirajā sattā, te apparajakkhe. Mahārajakkheti etthāpi eseva nayo. Ussadarāgādirajā mahārajakkhā.
“利根”:指具足信等之利根者。“钝根”:指具足信等之钝根者。此处所指即是“依止根”。“善行相”:指善的行相、善的素质,意为心向出离。“易教化”:指易于令其了悟正性决定,即具足信与慧者。“堪能”与“不堪能”:此处“堪能”指远离业障、烦恼障、果报障之人。与此相反,当知“恶行相”、“难教化”、“不堪能”。在此,于“尘少”者中,当知有“此人贪尘少,此人嗔尘少”等的通晓。其余诸项,亦同此理。因此,由于世尊无余地了知无量众生的依止等,故于众生界亦完全了知。显示巴利原文
Tikkhindriyeti tikhiṇehi saddhādīhi indriyehi samannāgate. Mudindriyeti mudukehi saddhādīhi indriyehi samannāgate. Upanissayaindriyāni nāma idhādhippetāni. Svākāreti sundarākāre kalyāṇapakatike, vivaṭṭajjhāsayeti attho. Suviññāpayeti sammattaniyāmaṃ viññāpetuṃ sukare saddhe, paññavante ca. Bhabbe abhabbeti ettha bhabbeti kammāvaraṇakilesāvaraṇavipākāvaraṇarahite. Vuttavipariyāyena dvākāraduviññāpayābhabbā veditabbā. Ettha ca ‘‘imassa rāgarajo appo, imassa dosarajo appo’’tiādinā apparajakkhesu jānanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Tasmāti yasmā bhagavā aparimāṇe satte āsayādito anavasesetvā jānāti, tasmā assa bhagavato sattalokopi sabbathā vidito.
难道众生的量等不应也了知吗?确实应了知。然而,了知这些并不能导向厌离、离欲、灭尽,故在此未被采纳。但世尊对它们同样完全了知、完全确定,只因并无必要,故未于教说中开演。因此说:显示巴利原文
Nanu ca sattesu pamāṇādipi jānitabbo atthīti? Atthi. Tassa pana jānanaṃ na nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāyāti idha na gahitaṃ, bhagavato pana tampi suviditaṃ suvavatthāpitameva, payojanābhāvā desanaṃ nāruḷhaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ –
那时,世尊用指甲尖端挑起少许尘土,对比丘们说:“诸比丘,你们如何思量?是我指甲尖上这少许尘土多,还是这大地多呢?”等语(见《相应部》第5卷1121经)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho bhagavā parittaṃ nakhasikhāyaṃ paṃsuṃ āropetvā bhikkhū āmantesi ‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, katamaṃ nu kho bahutaraṃ – yo vāyaṃ mayā paritto nakhasikhāyaṃ paṃsu āropito, ayaṃ vā mahāpathavī’’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.1121).
137 137. 与“器世间亦完全了知”相连。“轮围”即世界界。因其被状如轮缘的轮围山周匝环绕,故称“轮围”。“三千四百”:即三十个百又四百,意为三千四百。“三百五十”:即三个半百,意为三百五十。“那由他”:即一万。“已说”:义为已作说明。“安立”:指于下方、上方等一切处所的安立。显示巴利原文
137. Okāsalokopi sabbathā viditoti sambandho. Cakkavāḷanti lokadhātu. Sā hi nemimaṇḍalasadisena cakkavāḷapabbatena samantato parikkhittattā ‘‘cakkavāḷa’’nti vuccati. Catutiṃsasatāni cāti catuadhikāni tiṃsasatāni, tīṇisahassāni, cattārisatāni cāti attho . Aḍḍhuḍḍhānīti upaḍḍhacatutthāni, tīṇisatāni, paññāsañcāti attho. Nahutānīti dasasahassāni. Saṅkhātāti kathitā. Saṇṭhitīti heṭṭhā, uparito cāti sabbaso ṭhiti.
如此安立:即这样安住下来。此处:指轮围界中。极高即此量:其高度恰好正是这八万四千由旬。不仅此处有其高度,它的长度与宽度也恰是此量。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṇṭhiteti evamavaṭṭhite. Etthāti cakkavāḷe. Accuggato tāvadevāti tattakameva caturāsīti yojanasahassāniyeva ubbedho . Na kevalaṃ cettha ubbedhova, atha kho āyāmavitthārāpissa tattakāyeva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“诸比丘,须弥山王长八万四千由旬,宽八万四千由旬。”(《增支部》7.66)显示巴利原文
‘‘Sineru, bhikkhave, pabbatarājā caturāsīti yojanasahassāni āyāmena, caturāsīti yojanasahassāni vitthārenā’’ti (a. ni. 7.66).
从彼处:须弥山的下方和上方,依所说之量。‘半半’:即一半一半。此意为:持双山沉入海四万二千由旬,同样高出海面四万二千由旬;伊沙陀罗山沉入海二万一千由旬,同样高出海面二万一千由旬。依此理,其余诸山亦应知为半半之量。正如大海渐次倾斜直至轮围山脚,同样,持双山乃至须弥山脚,其下半量亦稳固立于地中,伊沙陀罗等山亦应如此看待。此已说:‘诸比丘,大海渐次倾斜、渐次低垂、渐次下倾。’(《自说》45;《律藏·小品》384;《增支部》8.19)须弥山与持双山等之间,名为七海。据说其宽度依次与须弥山等极高之量相等。‘梵’:即广大。显示巴利原文
Tatoti sinerussa heṭṭhā, upari ca vuttappamāṇato. Upaḍḍhupaḍḍhenāti upaḍḍhena upaḍḍhena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – dvācattālīsa yojanasahassāni samudde ajjhogāḷho tattakameva ca upari uggato yugandharapabbato, ekavīsa yojanasahassāni samudde ajjhogāḷho tattakameva ca upari uggato īsadharo pabbatoti iminā nayena sesesupi upaḍḍhupaḍḍhapamāṇatā veditabbā. Yathā mahāsamuddo yāva cakkavāḷapādamūlā anupubbaninno, evaṃ yāva sinerupādamūlāti heṭṭhā sinerupamāṇato upaḍḍhapamāṇopi yugandharapabbato pathaviyaṃ suppatiṭṭhito, evaṃ īsadharādayopīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ ‘‘mahāsamuddo, bhikkhave, anupubbaninno anupubbapoṇo anupubbapabbhāro’’ti (udā. 45; cūḷava. 384; a. ni. 8.19). Sineruyugandharādīnaṃ antare sīdantarasamuddā nāma. Te vitthārato yathākkamaṃ sineruādīnaṃ accuggatasamānaparimāṇāti vadanti. Brahāti mahanto.
‘须弥山的周围’:以围绕的方式位于须弥山的周围。首先围绕须弥山而住的是持双山,围绕持双山而住的是伊沙陀罗山。如此,各各围绕而住,故说‘须弥山的周围’。显示巴利原文
Sinerussa samantatoti parikkhipanavasena sinerussa samantato ṭhitā. Sineruṃ tāva parikkhipitvā ṭhito yugandharo, taṃ parikkhipitvā īsadharo. Evaṃ taṃ taṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitā ‘‘sinerussa samantato’’ti vuttā.
‘高五百由旬,雪山五峰’:即雪山高五百由旬。‘名为树’:即以‘树’之名所称呼的树。‘树干高五十由旬,枝长五十由旬’:即树干高五十由旬,枝向四周各长五十由旬。由此,其广百由旬,高亦如此。‘以其威力’:即以其广大、住劫等威力。显示巴利原文
Yojanānaṃ satānucco, himavā pañca pabbatoti himavā pabbato pañca yojanānaṃ satāni ucco ubbedho. Nagavhayāti naga-saddena avhātabbā rukkhābhidhānā. Paññāsayojanakkhandhasākhāyāmāti’ ubbedhato paññāsayojanakkhandhāyāmā, ubbedhato, samantato ca paññāsayojanasākhāyāmā ca. Tato eva satayojanavitthiṇṇā, tāvadeva ca uggatā. Yassānubhāvenāti yassā mahantatā kappaṭṭhāyitādippakārena pabhāvena.
金翅鸟的木棉树,挺立于须弥山的第二层阶地。显示巴利原文
Garuḷānaṃ simbalirukkho sinerussa dutiyaparibhaṇḍe patiṭṭhito.
“Sirīsenā”:此为具格。“第七”:依词性转换而说,义为“成为第七”。显示巴利原文
Sirīsenāti paccatte karaṇavacanaṃ. Sattamanti liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ, sirīso bhavati sattamoti attho.
其中,月轮在下,日轮在上。月轮因靠近日轮,缺失自身阴影而显现。它们在持双山山顶高度的空中,相隔一由旬而运行。阿修罗宫位于须弥山之下,无间地狱位于阎浮洲之下。阎浮洲形如车,西牛货洲形如镜,东胜身洲形如半月,北俱卢洲形如座。据说各洲居民及诸附属岛屿居民的面貌,亦如其洲形。“于其间”:即于诸轮围之间。正如三片叶子相互靠近放置,其间留有间隙,每三道轮围之间各有一处世界中间地狱。显示巴利原文
Tattha caṇḍamaṇḍalaṃ heṭṭhā, sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ upari. Tassa āsannabhāvena candamaṇḍalaṃ attano chāyāya vikalabhāvena upaṭṭhāti. Tāni yojanantarikāni yugandharaggapamāṇe ākāse vicaranti. Asurabhavanaṃ sinerussa heṭṭhā. Avīci jambudīpassa. Jambudīpo sakaṭasaṇṭhāno. Aparagoyānaṃ ādāsasaṇṭhāno. Pubbavideho addhacandasaṇṭhāno. Uttarakuru pīṭhasaṇṭhāno. Taṃtaṃnivāsīnaṃ, taṃtaṃparivāradīpavāsīnañca manussānaṃ mukhampi taṃtaṃsaṇṭhānanti vadanti. Tadantaresūti tesaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antaresu. Tiṇṇaṃ hi pattānaṃ aññamaññaāsannabhāvena ṭhapitānaṃ antarasadise tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antare ekeko lokantaranirayo.
“无量”:即不可计量,他人无法以“有如此多”来衡量。世尊以无量的佛智了知:“虚空无量,众生界无量,轮围世界无量。”佛智了知这三种无量,其自身亦是无量,故能予以界定。因为所知有多少,智就有多少;智有多少,所知就有多少。智以所知为边际,所知以智为边际。因此说“以无量佛智了知”。其无量性,当知即由通达无量的所知、于其中无碍而行。于此,莫非亦应说了知劫成等吗?实应说,然而彼将于后文神通解说中述及,故此处未取。显示巴利原文
Anantānīti aparimāṇāni, ‘‘ettakānī’’ti aññehi minituṃ asakkuṇeyyāni. Bhagavā anantena buddhañāṇena avedi ‘‘ananto ākāso, ananto sattanikāyo, anantāni cakkavāḷānī’’ti tividhampi anantaṃ buddhañāṇaṃ paricchindati sayampi anantattā. Yāvatakaṃ hi ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ. Ñeyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ ñeyyanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anantena buddhañāṇena avedī’’ti. Anantatā cassa anantañeyyapaṭivijjhaneneva veditabbā tattha appaṭihatacārattā. Nanu cettha vivaṭṭādīnampi viditatā vattabbāti? Saccaṃ vattabbaṃ, sā pana parato abhiññākathāyaṃ āgamissatīti idha na gahitā.
138 “自”:此为从格。“以功德而自为最胜者”:此为关联。此处取“更”字,是为解释“无上”一词之义,并非表示有某位最胜者存在。因为于天世间中,实无任何与如来相似者,何况相等。最胜者更不必说。“任何”:即任何一者。“胜伏”:即由于具足戒德,依止于惭、愧、慈、悲等殊胜因缘,以及信、念、精进、慧等殊胜条件,从证得以来,即非他人所共有,因已断除习气的敌对法,达到彼岸、最为殊胜的导师戒德。以此,世尊确然胜伏天世间而住,不为任何所胜伏——这是意旨所在。同样,于定德等亦应各别解说。这些戒等,当知为世间与出世间相杂。而解脱智见,则是世间、唯属欲界。显示巴利原文
138.Attanāti nissakkavacanametaṃ. Guṇehi attanā visiṭṭhatarassāti sambandho. Tara-ggahaṇaṃ cettha ‘‘anuttaro’’ti padassa atthaniddesatāya kataṃ, na visiṭṭhassa kassaci atthitāya. Sadevake hi loke sadisakappopi nāma koci tathāgatassa natthi, kuto sadiso. Visiṭṭhe pana kā kathā. Kassacīti kassacipi. Abhibhavatīti sīlasampadāya upanissayabhūtānaṃ hirottappamettākaruṇānaṃ, visesapaccayānaṃ saddhāsativīriyapaññānañca ukkaṃsappattiyā samudāgamato paṭṭhāya anaññasādhāraṇo savāsanapaṭipakkhassa pahīnattā ukkaṃsapāramippatto satthu sīlaguṇo. Tena bhagavā sadevakaṃ lokaṃ aññadatthu abhibhuyya pavattati, na sayaṃ kenaci abhibhuyyatīti adhippāyo. Evaṃ samādhiguṇādīsupi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Sīlādayo cete lokiyalokuttaramissakā veditabbā. Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ pana lokiyaṃ kāmāvacarameva.
若如此,彼如何胜伏天世间?因其威力亦无与伦比。彼威力于境界、转起及转起行相,皆更为殊胜。彼威力乃缘于非他人所共有的导师解脱德而转起,转起时非寻伺所能行,极深、极细、极微妙,因敌对法已善断除,故极明显、极广大而转起,且因已得自在,有分心停留极为短暂,故能速疾转起。显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ, kathaṃ tena sadevakaṃ lokaṃ abhibhavatīti? Tassāpi ānubhāvato asadisattā. Tampi hi visayato, pavattito, pavatti ākārato ca uttaritarameva. Taṃ hi anaññasādhāraṇaṃ satthu vimuttiguṇaṃ ārabbha pavattati, pavattamānañca atakkāvacaraṃ paramagambhīraṃ saṇhasukhumaṃ savisayaṃ paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ suppahīnattā suṭṭhu pākaṭaṃ vibhūtataraṃ katvā pavattati, sammadeva ca vasībhāvassa pāpitattā, bhavaṅgaparivāsassa ca atiparittakattā lahuṃ lahuṃ pavattatīti.
如此,在阐明世尊于戒等功德上更无超出者之后,为显明连与他相等者亦不存在,而说“无等”等语。其中,“无等”是指在任一时期,皆无有能在戒等功德上与其相等或相近者,故是“无等”。同样的,既与过去、未来诸佛相等,又与那些已然无等者相等,故为“无等等”。于戒等功德中,他并无堪为对比的范本,故为“无模范”。其余诸词亦准此而知。在此,仅作为譬喻的,是为“模范”;相似的譬喻是为“映象”;依一对一并列比照而成立的,当知是为“对者”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sīlādiguṇehi bhagavato uttaritarassa abhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni sadisassāpi abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘asamo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha asamoti ekasmiṃ kāle natthi etassa sīlādiguṇena samā sadisāti asamo. Tathā asamehi atītānāgatabuddhehi samo, asamā vā samā etassāti asamasamo. Sīlādiguṇena natthi etassa paṭimāti appaṭimo. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Tattha upamāmattaṃ paṭimā, sadisūpamā paṭibhāgo, yugaggāhavasena ṭhito paṭipuggalo veditabbo.
“然而,我确实不见”之意是:我以一切眼遍观世间,如观掌中之余甘子,于彼含括天界……的众生中,我确实不见有任何人在戒的成就上比我自己更为具戒、戒德更为圆满的人。比丘们,那意味着如此之人不存在。《最胜净信经》等中,于此说道——显示巴利原文
Na kho panāhaṃ samanupassāmīti mama samantacakkhunā hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya sabbalokaṃ passantopi tattha sadevake…pe… pajāya attanā attato sīlasampannataraṃ sampannatarasīlaṃ kañci puggalaṃ na kho pana passāmi, tādisassa abhāvatoti adhippāyo. Aggappasādasuttādīnīti ettha –
“诸比丘,凡所有众生,或为无足、或为二足、或为四足、或为多足、或为有色、或为无色、或有想、或无想、或非想非非想,如来皆被称说为其中之最上者——即阿罗汉、正自觉者。诸比丘,凡于佛陀起净信者,即是对最上者起净信;于最上者起净信者,其果报亦是最上。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā catuppadā vā bahuppadā vā rūpino vā arūpino vā saññino vā asaññino vā nevasaññināsaññino vā, tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyati arahaṃ sammāsambuddho. Ye, bhikkhave, buddhe pasannā, agge te pasannā. Agge kho pana pasannānaṃ aggo vipāko hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34; 5.32; 10.15; itivu90) –
此是《最胜净信经》。以“等”字——显示巴利原文
Idaṃ aggappasādasuttaṃ. Ādi-saddena –
在天……乃至天与人世间,如来是征服者、不被征服者、全见者、自在者,故被称为“如来”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sadevake…pe… sadevamanussāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.24; dī. ni. 3.188) –
当知如是等经文。在以“等”字起始的偈颂中——显示巴利原文
Evamādīni suttapadāni veditabbāni. Ādikā gāthāyoti ettha –
我实是世间阿拉汉,我是无上导师;
我是唯一的正自觉者,我已清凉,已寂灭。
在应调伏者中,我是最上的调伏者;在应寂静者中,我是寂静的仙人。
已解脱者,于令得解脱者中为最上;已渡越者,于令得渡越者中为殊胜。
非于此世,亦非于彼世,
无有与佛陀相等或更胜者;
他被称许为应供养者中的最上者,
是求福者、求广大果报者中的最上。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ahaṃ hi arahā loke, ahaṃ satthā anuttaro; Ekomhi sammāsambuddho, sītibhūtosmi nibbuto. (mahāva. 11; ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341); ‘‘Danto damayataṃ seṭṭho, santo samayataṃ isi; Mutto mocayataṃ aggo, tiṇṇo tārayataṃ varo. (itivu. 112); ‘‘Nayimasmiṃ loke parasmiṃ vā pana, Buddhena seṭṭho sadiso ca vijjati; Yamāhu dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ aggataṃ gato, Puññatthikānaṃ vipulaphalesina’’nti. (vi. va. 1047; kathā. 799) –
诸如此类的偈颂应当广说。显示巴利原文
Evamādikā gāthā vitthāretabbā.
139 “调伏”意为令寂静,即令与身等专注结合。而那种与身等专注的结合,即是如理地令安立于彼分断除等之中,故说“即谓引导”。应被调伏者,即堪能调伏者。“非人”指不是人者。此处显示其相似性,即仅具人形者不存在,其余同类如夜叉等方称为“非人”,并非任何与人不同者皆可称之。正如对畜生类别有另举,夜叉等即被指出。阿波逻罗是雪山住者;小腹、大腹是龙岛住者;火顶、烟顶是狮子洲住者。通过去除嗔毒而令其无毒,故说“令安立于皈依与戒中”。崛牙等,由“等”字应知包含瞿昙目佉、优波离居士等。帝释天王等,由“等”字应知包含阿阇迦罗波夜叉、跋迦梵天等。而此处的经文,即是这部《结发经》。已引导者,以种种引导方便,应如此广说,即如理地以柔和等方便显示引导。显示巴利原文
139.Dametīti sameti, kāyasamādīhi yojetīti attho. Taṃ pana kāyasamādīhi yojanaṃ yathārahaṃ tadaṅgavinayādīsu patiṭṭhāpanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘vinetīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Dametuṃ yuttāti damanārahā. Amanussapurisāti ettha na manussāti amanussā. Taṃsadisatā ettha jotīyati, tena manussattamattaṃ natthi, aññaṃ samānanti yakkhādayo ‘‘amanussā’’ti adhippetā, na ye keci manussehi aññe. Tathā hi tiracchānapurisānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ kataṃ, yakkhādayo eva ca niddiṭṭhā. Apalālo himavantavāsī. Cūḷodaramahodarā nāgadīpavāsino. Aggisikhadhūmasikhā sīhaḷadīpavāsino. Nibbisā katā dosavisassa vinodanena. Tenāha ‘‘saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpitā’’ti. Kūṭadantādayoti ādi-saddena ghoṭamukhaupāligahapatiādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sakkadevarājādayoti ādi-saddena ajakalāpayakkhabakabrahmādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Idaṃ cettha suttanti idaṃ kesisuttaṃ. Vinītā vicitrehi vinayanūpāyehīti etasmiṃ atthe vitthāretabbaṃ yathārahaṃ saṇhādīhi upāyehi vinayassa dīpanato.
“清净戒等者的初禅等”,即如“清净戒者的初禅,初禅获得者的第二禅”等,如此逐一说明其上上的差别,这是关联。“入流者等”中,道理也相同。“即使已调伏者,也仍说调伏”这一说法,是因为前文已说“一切以一切方式未达调伏的应调伏之人”。而对于那些调伏之事尚未完成、尚未完全超越应调伏状态的有情,则说“即使已调伏者,也仍说调伏”。因为他们也是应调伏之人,故导师予以调伏。显示巴利原文
Visuddhasīlādīnaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīnīti ‘‘visuddhasīlassa paṭhamajjhānaṃ, paṭhamajjhānalābhino dutiyajjhāna’’ntiādinā tassa tassa uparūpari visesaṃ ācikkhantoti sambandho. Sotāpannādīnanti etthāpi eseva nayo. ‘‘Dantepi dametiyevā’’ti idaṃ pubbe ‘‘sabbena sabbaṃ damathaṃ anupagatā purisadammā’’ti vuttāti katvā vuttaṃ. Ye pana vippakatadammabhāvā sabbathā dametabbataṃ nātivattā, te satte sandhāya ‘‘dantepi dametiyevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tepi hi purisadammā evāti, yato ne satthā dameti.
“义句”指能表达意义的语句,即句子。因为意义由句子表达,而非仅由名词等单词。而且,以一词之体,显示了导师“应调伏人之御者”这一不共特质。故说“世尊确实”等。“八方”指八种等至。它们虽相互关联,却以不混杂的状态显现,故称为“方”,或因如同方向而称为“方”。“不执著”指不滞留,因达到自在状态而无著而行。以速行故“奔驰”。仅向一方奔驰,意指不回转自身之身。然而,被导师调伏的应调伏之人,仅以一种威仪便向八方奔驰。故说“仅以一跏趺坐而坐”。而“八方”仅是举例,因为他们还趋向世间未曾至的灭尽等至之方,以及不死之方。显示巴利原文
Atthapadanti atthābhibyañjakapadaṃ, vākyanti attho. Vākyena hi atthābhibyatti, na nāmādipadamattena. Ekapadabhāvena ca anaññasādhāraṇo satthu purisadammasārathibhāvo dassito hoti. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādi. Aṭṭha disāti aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Tā hi aññamaññasambandhāpi asaṃkiṇṇabhāvena dissanti apadissantīti disā, disā viyāti vā disā. Asajjamānāti na sajjamānā vasībhāvappattiyā nissaṅgacārā. Dhāvanti javanavuttiyogato. Ekaṃyeva disaṃ dhāvati, attano kāyaṃ aparivattentoti adhippāyo. Satthārā pana damitā purisadammā ekiriyāpatheneva aṭṭha disā dhāvanti. Tenāha ‘‘ekapallaṅkeneva nisinnā’’ti. Aṭṭha disāti ca nidassanamattametaṃ, lokiyehi agatapubbaṃ nirodhasamāpattidisaṃ, amatadisañca pakkhandanato.
140 所谓“现法”,即现前自身的存在;致力于此者,称为“现法者”,追求此世利益。所谓“来世”,是由于业与烦恼而应被转生、应被正确前往的他世;致力于此者,称为“来世者”,追求他世利益。最上、最胜的利益是“胜义”,即涅槃。如来以这些现法、来世与胜义利益,随相应机而教导。所谓随应,即随顺适合;在这些利益中,哪一类众生适合哪一种,便依那种利益加以教导。教导,即是调伏、令安立于那种利益之中。与利益一同运行者,称为“商队”,亦即携带货物资本经商而往他方的人群。以利益教诫等方式应被保护、应被教导者,他具备此,故为“导师”,即商队主。世尊如同商队主,因此说“如导师,实为导师,世尊正是商队主”。显示巴利原文
140. Diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkho attabhāvo, tattha niyuttoti diṭṭhadhammiko, idhalokattho . Kammakilesavasena samparetabbato sammā gantabbato samparāyo, paraloko, tattha niyuttoti samparāyiko, paralokattho. Paramo uttamo attho paramattho, nibbānaṃ. Tehi diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi. Yathārahanti yathānurūpaṃ. Tesu atthesu yo yo puggalo yaṃ yaṃ arahati, tadanurūpaṃ. Anusāsatīti vineti tasmiṃ atthe patiṭṭhapeti, saha atthena vattatīti sattho, bhaṇḍamūlena vāṇijjāya desantaraṃ gacchanto janasamūho. Hitupadesādivasena paripāletabbo sāsitabbo so etassa atthīti satthā, satthavāho. So viya bhagavāti āha ‘‘satthā viyāti satthā, bhagavā satthavāho’’ti.
现在为了以解释章句的方式显示这一意义,而说“如商队主”等。其中,“商队中”指商队的人们。“险路”,意为“于此渡过”,即无水的荒野区域;但依惯用语,其他荒野区域也称作险路。“盗贼险路”指盗贼所盘踞的险路,“猛兽险路”亦然。“饥馑险路”指难以获得食物的险路。“渡越”即越过不安稳之处。“令渡出”等是通过前缀扩展的语句。或者,“令渡出”是引导至安稳之地而渡越;“令渡离”是令从不安稳之处出离而渡越;“令渡达”是摄持而渡越,如同以手摄持而渡越,这是其义。所有这些渡越、令渡出等,都是令安立于安稳之处,故说“令到达安稳之地”。“众生”指应被调伏的众生。由于大丛林、大无意义、难以渡越,生本身就是险路,称为“生险路”,即那生险路。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ niddesapāḷinayena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā satthavāho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sattheti satthike jane. Kaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāro, nirudako araññappadeso. Ruḷhīvasena pana itaropi araññappadeso tathā vuccati. Corakantāranti corehi adhiṭṭhitakantāraṃ. Tathā vāḷakantāraṃ. Dubbhikkhakantāranti dullabhabhikkhaṃ kantāraṃ. Tāretīti akhemantaṭṭhānaṃ atikkāmeti. Uttāretītiādi upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā vuttaṃ. Atha vā uttāretīti khemantabhūmiṃ upanento tāreti. Nittāretīti akhemantaṭṭhānato nikkhāmento tāreti. Patāretīti pariggahetvā tāreti, hatthena pariggahetvā viya tāretīti attho. Sabbampetaṃ tāraṇuttāraṇādikhemaṭṭhāne ṭhapanamevāti āha ‘‘khemantabhūmiṃ sampāpetī’’ti. Satteti veneyyasatte. Mahāgahanatāya, mahānatthatāya, dunnittharaṇatāya ca jātiyeva kantāro jātikantāro, taṃ jātikantāraṃ.
“以最胜众生来界定”,是指以最胜众生作区分。因为只有天与人才是最胜众生,而非畜生等。“以堪能者来界定”,是指以能入正定聚的有情来划分。“此”即“天与人”这一句。“从世尊”是离格,如同“从亲教师学习”,或者指从世尊的近处。“具足亲依止缘”指三因结生等,是证得道果的强力因缘。显示巴利原文
Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasenāti ukkaṭṭhasattaparicchedavasena. Devamanussā eva hi ukkaṭṭhasattā, na tiracchānādayo. Bhabbapuggalaparicchedavasenāti sammattaniyāmokkamanassa yogyapuggalassa paricchindanavasena. Etanti ‘‘devamanussāna’’nti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Bhagavatoti nissakkavacanaṃ yathā ‘‘upajjhāyato ajjhetī’’ti, bhagavato santiketi vā attho. Upanissayasampattinti tihetukapaṭisandhiādikaṃ maggaphalādhigamassa balavakāraṇaṃ.
“迦伽罗”是名叫迦伽罗的国王的王后,又因这座池由她所建,故得名“迦伽罗”。他于声音取相,生起“这即是法”的法想,取相时以净信心卧于会众边缘。那人未看见杖已置于它头上,便站在那里压着杖而立。蛙也在杖被放置、被压住时,凭着对法所生的净信,无声无息地命终。天人自然会有这样的法性:“我从何处生于此间?我在那里造了什么业?”因此,当他见到自己的前生时,说:“啊,我也生于此。”于是,他以感恩所增长的敬爱、恭敬与尊重,顶礼世尊的双足。显示巴利原文
Gaggarāyāti gaggarāya nāma rañño deviyā, tāya vā kāritattā ‘‘gaggarā’’ti laddhanāmāya. Sare nimittaṃ aggahesīti ‘‘dhammo eso vuccatī’’ti dhammasaññāya sare nimittaṃ gaṇhi, gaṇhanto ca pasannacitto parisapariyante nipajji. Sannirumbhitvā aṭṭhāsīti tassa sīse daṇḍassa ṭhapitabhāvaṃ apassanto tattha daṇḍaṃ uppīḷetvā aṭṭhāsi. Maṇḍūkopi daṇḍe ṭhapitepi uppīḷitepi dhammagatena pasādena vissaramakarontova kālamakāsi. Devaloke nibbattasattānaṃ ayaṃ dhammatā, yā ‘‘kutohaṃ idha nibbatto, tattha kiṃ nu kho kammamakāsi’’nti āvajjanā. Tasmā attano purimabhavassa diṭṭhattā āha ‘‘are ahampi nāma idhanibbatto’’ti . Bhagavato pāde vandi kataññutāsaṃvaḍḍhitena pemagāravabahumānena.
世尊虽已了知,但为了让大众亲见业果与佛陀的威力,便以偈颂问:“谁在礼敬我?”此处,“谁”指天、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等中的哪一位,即何者,这是其义。“我”指我的。“足”指双足。“以神通”指以此种天神通。“以名声”指以此种随从与范围。“照耀”指闪耀。“以殊胜”指极其可爱、可意、美妙。“色”指肤色,即身体色泽。普照一切方,即照亮所有十方,宛如月亮、宛如太阳,作一片光明、一片光亮,这是其义。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā jānantova mahājanassa kammaphalaṃ, buddhānubhāvañca paccakkhaṃ kātukāmo ‘‘ko me vandatī’’ti gāthāya pucchi. Tattha koti devanāgayakkhagandhabbādīsu ko, katamoti attho. Meti mama. Pādānīti pāde. Iddhiyāti imāya evarūpāya deviddhiyā. ‘‘Yasasā’’ti iminā edisena parivārena, paricchedena ca. Jalanti vijjotamāno. Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kamanīyena sundarena. Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena sarīravaṇṇanibhāya. Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti sabbā dasapi disā pabhāsento, cando viya, sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekālokaṃ karontoti attho.
世尊如此询问后,天子表明自身而说偈颂:“我昔曾为蛙。”其中,“昔”指前生。“于水中”显示当时自己的出生地。“于水中为蛙”以此排除了旱地蛙等。“行境”意为牛觅食之处(牛于此觅食)。在此处,如同行境一般,故称行境,水为其行境,故称“水行境”。因为也有某些水生者如龟等并非水行境,所以特别说明“水行境”。听闻您的法,即在您以梵音、如杜鹃鸟鸣般美妙的声音说法时,以“这即是法”的方式于声音取相而听闻。这是不敬的属格用法。牧牛童杀了我,即守护牛犊的牧童来到我近旁,拄杖而立,将杖压在我头上,杀了我,这是其义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pana bhagavatā pucchito devaputto attānaṃ pavedento ‘‘maṇḍūkohaṃ pure āsi’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha pureti purimajātiyaṃ. ‘‘Udake’’ti idaṃ tadā attano uppattiṭṭhānadassanaṃ. ‘‘Udake maṇḍūko’’ti etena uddhamāyikādikassa thale maṇḍūkassa nivattanaṃ kataṃ hoti. Gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gunnaṃ ghāsesanaṭṭhānaṃ. Idha pana gocaro viyāti gocaro, vāri udakaṃ gocaro etassāti vārigocaro. Udakacārīpi hi koci kacchapādi avārigocaropi hotīti ‘‘vārigocaro’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Tava dhammaṃ suṇantassāti brahmassarena karavīkarutamañjunā desentassa tava dhammaṃ ‘‘dhammo eso vuccatī’’ti sare nimittaggāhavasena suṇantassa. Anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Avadhi vacchapālakoti vacche rakkhanto gopāladārako mama samīpaṃ āgantvā daṇḍamolubbha tiṭṭhanto mama sīse daṇḍaṃ sannirumbhitvā maṃ māresīti attho.
所谓“作微笑”即:因“以如此微小的福业威力,也能获得如此极其广大的世间与出世间成就”而生起喜悦与满意,以更加闪耀、洁白、放射的可见光芒,愈发照亮该处,作微笑。他因喜悦与满意——显示巴利原文
Sitaṃ katvāti ‘‘tathā parittatarenāpi puññānubhāvena evaṃ ativiya uḷārā lokiyalokuttarā sampattiyo labbhantī’’ti pītisomanassajāto bhāsurataradhavalavipphurantadassanakiraṇāvalīhi bhiyyoso mattāya taṃ padesaṃ obhāsento sitaṃ katvā. Pītisomanassavasena hi so –
请看我片刻心净信所得的神通与名声;
请看我的威力,请看我的色泽与光辉。
长久以来,那些听闻您乔达摩之法者,
他们已达不动之处,到了那里便不再忧愁。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Muhuttaṃ cittapasādassa, iddhiṃ passa yasañca me; Ānubhāvañca me passa, vaṇṇaṃ passa jutiñca me. ‘‘Ye ca te dīghamaddhānaṃ, dhammaṃ assosuṃ gotama; Pattā te acalaṭṭhānaṃ, yattha gantvā na socare’’ti. (vi. va. 859-860);
说完这两首偈颂,他就离开了。显示巴利原文
Imā dve gāthā vatvā pakkāmi.
141 关于“任何何物”,此处“任何”是不定词。同样,“何物”也是如此。而“又”字仅是言辞的修饰。因此,“任何何物”是对所知进行了无余穷尽的概括。或者,“又”是显示差别意义的助词。由此,以“正自觉者”一词,简略及详细地说明了导师对四圣谛的现观;而以“佛”一词,则说明了对其他所知的觉悟。或者,前者是导师的证悟智慧之威力,后者是说法智慧之威力。如此,下文将阐述的差别意义得以显明。从一切对立面中完全解脱,故为“解脱”,即最上道。其内部是最上果,于其中存在、于证得彼时当证得的,是解脱究竟智,与一切知智一起,即一切佛智。如此转起者——此处:显示巴利原文
141.Yaṃ pana kiñcīti ettha yanti aniyamitavacanaṃ. Tathā kiñcīti. Panāti vacanālaṅkāramattaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ kiñcīti ñeyyassa anavasesapariyādānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Panāti vā visesatthadīpako nipāto. Tena ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti iminā saṅkhepato, vitthārato ca satthu catusaccābhisambodho vutto. ‘‘Buddho’’ti pana iminā tadaññassapi ñeyyassāvabodho. Purimena vā satthu paṭivedhañāṇānubhāvo, pacchimena desanāñāṇānubhāvo. Pīti upari vuccamāno viseso jotīyati. Sabbaso paṭipakkhehi vimuccatīti vimokkho, aggamaggo. Tassa anto aggaphalaṃ, tattha bhavaṃ tasmiṃ laddhe laddhabbato vimokkhantikañāṇaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ sabbampi buddhañāṇaṃ. Evaṃ pavattoti ettha –
以一切知性而为佛,以一切见性而为佛,以不从他闻性而为佛,以绽放性而为佛,以名为漏尽者而为佛,以名为无染着者而为佛,以一向离贪者而为佛,以一向离嗔者而为佛,以一向离痴者而为佛,以一向无烦恼者而为佛,以行一乘道者而为佛,以独自证得无上正自觉而为佛,以摧破无明、获得智慧而为佛。“佛”这个名称,不是母亲所施设,不是父亲所施设,不是兄弟所施设,不是姊妹所施设,不是朋友同僚所施设,不是亲戚血亲所施设,不是沙门婆罗门所施设,也不是诸天所施设。这是诸佛世尊在菩提树下,在证得一切知智的同时,所证得的解脱究竟施设——即所谓的“佛”。(《大义释》192)显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbaññutāya buddho, sabbadassāvitāya buddho, anaññaneyyatāya buddho, visavitāya buddho, khīṇāsavasaṅkhātena buddho, nirupalepasaṅkhātena buddho, ekantavītarāgoti buddho, ekantavītadosoti buddho, ekantavītamohoti buddho, ekantanikkilesoti buddho, ekāyanamaggaṃ gatoti buddho, eko anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti buddho, abuddhivihatattā buddhipaṭilābhā buddho. Buddhoti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kataṃ, na pitarā kataṃ, na bhātarā kataṃ, na bhaginiyā kataṃ, na mittāmaccehikataṃ, na ñātisālohitehi kataṃ, na samaṇabrāhmaṇehi kataṃ, na devatāhi kataṃ. Vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ buddho’’ti (mahāni. 192) –
这是《义释》的圣典方法。而且,由于在此它与《无碍解道》的圣典并无差别,因此为了显示以二者中任一种即可成就义理,而说了“或无碍解道的方法”,此中的“或”字表示不定的意义。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ niddesapāḷinayo. Yasmā cettha tassā paṭisambhidāpāḷiyā bhedo natthi, tasmā dvīsu ekenāpi atthasiddhīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭisambhidānayo vā’’ti aniyamattho vā-saddo vutto.
其中,如同世间中,了知者被称为“已了知”,同样,觉悟诸谛者,依纯粹的行为者之义而称为佛。如同吹枯叶之风被称为“枯叶风”,同样,令众生觉悟者,依使动的作者之义而称为佛;此处使动义已包含在内。显示巴利原文
Tattha yathā loke avagantā ‘‘avagato’’ti vuccati, evaṃ bujjhitā saccānīti buddho suddhakattuvasena. Yathā paṇṇasosā vātā ‘‘paṇṇasusā’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ bodhetā pajāyāti buddho hetukattuvasena, hetuattho cettha antonīto.
“以一切知性而为佛”的意思是:以能觉悟一切法的智慧而为佛。“以一切见性而为佛”的意思是:因为以智眼见一切法而为佛。“以不从他闻性而为佛”的意思是:不由他人令觉悟,而是自己觉悟故而为佛。“以绽放性而为佛”的意思是:如莲花般绽放种种功德,以开敷之义而为佛。此后,“以名为漏尽者而为佛”等,以六种方式说明:如同从沉睡中醒来的人,因从一切烦恼的沉睡中觉醒故,说为佛。“以行一乘道者而为佛”的意思是:由于所行之道即是智慧之义,而智慧之义亦可得行道之义,故因行一乘道而称为佛。“以独自现观无上正等觉者而为佛”的意思是:非由他人令觉悟而为佛,而是自己现观无上正等觉故,而为佛。“以摧破无明、获得智慧而为佛”:智慧、觉悟、觉了,其义无别。其中,如同因具有红色属性而称为红布,同样,因具佛陀功德而称为佛,这是为了说明此义而说。此后,“‘佛’此名,非母所作”等,是为了说明此施设是随义而立的。如是,由这些理由,亦应知世尊为佛。显示巴利原文
Sabbaññutāya buddhoti sabbadhammabujjhanasamatthāya buddhiyā buddhoti attho. Sabbadassāvitāya buddhoti sabbadhammānaṃ ñāṇacakkhunā diṭṭhattā buddhoti attho. Anaññaneyyatāya buddhoti aññena abodhanīto sayameva buddhattā buddhoti attho. Visavitāya buddhoti nānāguṇavisavanato padumamiva vikasanaṭṭhena buddhoti attho. Khīṇāsavasaṅkhātena buddhoti evamādīhi chahi pariyāyehi niddakkhayavibuddho puriso viya sabbakilesaniddakkhayavibuddhattā buddhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ekāyanamaggaṃ gatoti buddhoti gamanatthānaṃ buddhiatthatāya buddhiatthānampi gamanatthatā labbhatīti ekāyanamaggaṃ gatattā buddhoti vuccatīti attho. Eko anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti buddhoti na parehi buddhattā buddho, atha kho sayameva anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhattā buddhoti attho. Abuddhivihatattā buddhipaṭilābhā buddhoti buddhi buddhaṃ bodhoti anatthantaraṃ. Tattha yathā rattaguṇayogato ratto paṭo, evaṃ buddhaguṇayogato buddhoti ñāpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tato paraṃ buddhoti netaṃ nāmantiādi atthānugatāyaṃ paññattīti bodhanatthaṃ vuttanti evamettha imināpi kāraṇena bhagavā buddhoti veditabbaṃ.
142 “他的”是指世尊的。“具德、最胜、一切众生中最上、应受尊重之增上语”的意思是:此“世尊”一语,是对于具足戒等一切功德、因此为一切众生中最上者、应受尊重者,出于尊重而说的增上语。确实如此,因为世间主具有无量、无与伦比的威光、戒等功德殊胜,以先遣除一切不利为先导,致力于无余的利乐安立,具有无上的加行成就,对包括天人在内的众生作最上的饶益,并在无量世界中对无量众生,是最上尊重的对象。显示巴利原文
142.Assāti bhagavato. Guṇavisiṭṭhasabbasattuttamagarugāravādhivacananti sabbehi sīlādiguṇehi visiṭṭhassa tato eva sabbasattehi uttamassa garuno gāravavasena vuttavacanamidaṃ bhagavāti. Tathā hi lokanātho aparimitanirupamappabhāvasīlādiguṇavisesasamaṅgitāya sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya, accantupakāritāya ca aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ uttamagāravaṭṭhānanti.
“世尊”一词,意即“最胜”,这是说,因为与最胜功德相伴,故称为能诠表“最胜”之词。又或者,“所说”即言语、意义。因此,以“世尊”一词所应诠表的意义,即是“最胜”义。“世尊”一词亦即“无上”,此处也是同样的道理。“应受尊重者”,指具足应受尊重的德性,因具足应受尊重的功德故;又或者,应极受尊重,故称“应受尊重者”,意即值得尊重。显示巴利原文
Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhanti seṭṭhavācakaṃ vacanaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato ‘‘seṭṭha’’nti vuttaṃ. Atha vā vuccatīti vacanaṃ, attho. Tasmā yo ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vacanena vacanīyo attho, so seṭṭhoti attho. Bhagavāti vacanamuttamanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Gāravayuttoti garubhāvayutto garuguṇayogato, garukaraṇaṃ vā sātisayaṃ arahatīti gāravayutto, gāravārahoti attho.
“世尊”这一名称因特别殊胜的功德而来,以上是略说的含义。为了详细分别,先以举要的方式显示其名称,故说“名称有四种”等。其中,依状态而立的名称,是指随状态而被知晓,依各种状态施设、称呼的名称。同样,依相而立的名称,是指依各种相而称呼的名称。依征兆而立的名称,是指从征兆而来的名称。随意而起的名称,是指随欲而起、随欲而来、任意的名称。以第一个“等”字摄括了愚者、青年、老者等;以第二个,摄括了剃度者、结发者等;以第三个,摄括了多闻者、说法者、禅修者等;以第四个,摄括了“阿含利沙那”“巴瓦阇那”等。为了以遮遣的方式确立“依征兆而立的名称”的含义,便说“非因摩诃摩耶……”等。“以解脱为归结的名称”,以此显示这一名称是在圣者种姓出生的刹那便已生起的。如果是以解脱为归结的名称,那么为何与其他漏尽者不共呢?回答说:“与获得一切知智共起。”因为诸佛的阿罗汉果在成就时,是与一切知智等所有佛陀功德一同成就的。因此说“以解脱为归结的名称”。“亲证的施设”,是指以对一切法的亲证为因的施设。又或者,“亲证的施设”指现量成就。显示巴利原文
Guṇavisesahetukaṃ ‘‘bhagavā’’ti idaṃ bhagavato nāmanti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato vibhajitukāmo nāmaṃyeva tāva atthuddhāravasena dassento ‘‘catubbidhaṃ vā nāma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha āvatthikanti avatthāya viditaṃ taṃ taṃ avatthaṃ upādāya paññattaṃ voharitaṃ. Tathā liṅgikaṃ tena tena liṅgena voharitaṃ. Nemittikanti nimittato āgataṃ. Adhiccasamuppannanti yadicchāya pavattaṃ, yadicchāya āgataṃ yadicchakaṃ. Paṭhamena ādi-saddena bālo, yuvā, vuḍḍhoti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti, dutiyena muṇḍī, jaṭīti evamādiṃ, tatiyena bahussuto, dhammakathiko, jhāyīti evamādiṃ, catutthena aghamarisanaṃ pāvacananti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Nemittika’’nti vuttamatthaṃ byatirekavasena patiṭṭhāpetuṃ ‘‘na mahāmāyāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vimokkhantika’’nti iminā idaṃ nāmaṃ ariyāya jātiyā jātakkhaṇeyeva jātanti dasseti. Yadi vimokkhantikaṃ, atha kasmā aññehi khīṇāsavehi asādhāraṇanti āha ‘‘saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā’’ti. Buddhānañhi arahattaphalaṃ nipphajjamānaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇādīhi sabbehi buddhaguṇehi saddhiṃyeva nipphajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vimokkhantika’’nti. Sacchikā paññattīti sabbadhammānaṃ sacchikiriyānimittā paññatti. Atha vā sacchikā paññattīti paccakkhasiddhā paññatti. Yaṃguṇanimittā hi sā, te satthu paccakkhabhūtāti guṇā viya sāpi sacchikatā eva nāma hoti, na paresaṃ vohāramattenāti adhippāyo.
143 “他们说”,是出于对大长老的尊重而用复数表达,或者指结集者们所作的随喜之语。他拥有自在等殊胜品类的“薄伽”,故称“薄伽梵”。“已破”之义,指他已破除贪等恶法,即是“已破者”。“以多种方法”,指以身修习等多种修习次第。“善修习其自性者”,指正确地修习了自身自性者。此处的“自性”是反身代词。显示巴利原文
143.Vadantīti mahātherassa garubhāvato bahuvacanenāha, saṅgītikārehi vā katamanuvādaṃ sandhāya. Issariyādibhedo bhago assa atthīti bhagī. Akāsi bhagganti rāgādipāpadhammaṃ bhaggaṃ akāsi, bhaggavāti attho. Bahūhi ñāyehīti kāyabhāvanādikehi anekehi bhāvanākkamehi. Subhāvitattanoti sammadeva bhāvitasabhāvassa. Paccatte cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.
“依释义中所说的方法”者,此处即是释义之方法。显示巴利原文
Niddese vuttanayenāti etthāyaṃ niddesanayo –
“世尊”者,此是尊重的称呼。又,已破贪者,为世尊;已破嗔者,为世尊;已破痴者,为世尊;已破慢者,为世尊;已破见者,为世尊;已破渴爱者,为世尊;已破烦恼者,为世尊;已分别、已辨析、已详细分别法宝者,为世尊;已作诸有之终结者,为世尊;已修习身、已修习戒、已修习心、已修习慧者,为世尊。又,世尊已亲近荒野、林间、边远的坐卧处——他们少声、少喧杂、离人群、适合独处的坐卧处,故为世尊。又,世尊是衣、食、卧具、病缘医药资具的享有者,故为世尊。又,世尊是义味、法味、解脱味、增上戒、增上心、增上慧的享有者,故为世尊。又,世尊是四禅、四无量、四无色定的享有者,故为世尊。又,世尊是八解脱、八胜处、九次第住定成就的享有者,故为世尊。又,世尊是十种想修习、十遍处定成就、入出息念定、不净观成就的享有者,故为世尊。又,世尊是四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八圣道的享有者,故为世尊。又,世尊是十如来力、四无畏、四无碍解、六神通、六佛陀法的享有者,故为世尊。“世尊”这一名称……乃至……是亲证的施设,即此世尊。显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhagavāti gāravādhivacanametaṃ. Apica bhaggarāgoti bhagavā, bhaggadosoti bhagavā, bhaggamohoti bhagavā, bhaggamānoti bhagavā, bhaggadiṭṭhīti bhagavā, bhaggataṇhoti bhagavā, bhaggakilesoti bhagavā, bhaji vibhaji pavibhaji dhammaratananti bhagavā, bhavānaṃ antakaroti bhagavā, bhāvitakāyo bhāvitasīlo bhāvitacitto bhāvitapaññoti bhagavā, bhaji vā bhagavā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni appasaddāni appanigghosāni vijanavātāni manussarāhasseyyakāni paṭisallānasāruppānīti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānanti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā attharasassa dhammarasassa vimuttirasassa adhisīlassa adhicittassa adhipaññāyāti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ catunnaṃ appamaññānaṃ catunnaṃ arūpasamāpattīnanti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ abhibhāyatanānaṃ navannaṃ anupubbavihārasamāpattīnanti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā dasannaṃ saññābhāvanānaṃ dasannaṃ kasiṇasamāpattīnaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhissa asubhasamāpattiyāti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ catunnaṃ sammappadhānānaṃ catunnaṃ iddhipādānaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ pañcannaṃ balānaṃ sattannaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassāti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā dasannaṃ tathāgatabalānaṃ catunnaṃ vesārajjānaṃ catunnaṃ paṭisambhidānaṃ channaṃ abhiññānaṃ channaṃ buddhadhammānanti bhagavā, bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ…pe… sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ bhagavā’’ti (mahāni. 83).
此处,“尊重的称呼”等词,虽在偈颂中未依出现次第一一解释,但应知这些皆随宜作为那些诸词的解释。其中,“尊重的称呼”是指表达对尊长尊重之义的词语。“已分别”(bhaji),是指分部分地讲述,因此说“已辨析”(vibhaji)。“法宝”,是指道果等圣法之宝。再者,“已亲近”(bhaji),是指已侍奉、已依住。“享有者”(bhāgī),是指具有份额者。再者,“享有者”(bhāgī),是指习惯于亲近者。“义味”,是指以义为依处之味。即立于解脱处而说法者及听闻者,缘于彼义而生起的喜乐,是为义味。缘于法而生起的,是法味。关于此,有说“得义之觉受,得法之觉受”(增支部6.10)。“解脱味”,是指解脱本身之味,或以解脱为依处之味。“十种想修习”,是指无常想等十种想修习。“六种佛陀法”,是指六种不共智而说。各处“世尊”一词的语法构造,应依词源学的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘gāravādhivacana’’ntiādīni yadipi gāthāyaṃ āgatapadānukkamena na niddiṭṭhāni, yathārahaṃ pana tesaṃ sabbesampi niddesabhāvena veditabbāni. Tattha gāravādhivacananti garūnaṃ garubhāvavācakaṃ vacanaṃ. Bhajīti bhāgaso kathesi. Tenāha ‘‘vibhajī’’ti. Dhammaratananti maggaphalādiariyadhammaratanaṃ. Puna bhajīti sevi. Bhāgīti bhāgadheyyavā. Puna bhāgīti bhajanasīlo. Attharasassāti atthasannissayassa rasassa. Vimuttāyatanasīse hi ṭhatvā dhammaṃ kathentassa, suṇantassa ca tadatthaṃ ārabbha uppajjanakapītisomanassaṃ attharaso. Dhammaṃ ārabbha dhammaraso. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammaveda’’nti (a. ni. 6.10). Vimuttirasassāti vimuttibhūtassa, vimuttisannissayassa vā rasassa. Saññābhāvanānanti aniccasaññādīnaṃ dasannaṃ saññābhāvanānaṃ. Channaṃ buddhadhammānanti cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha ‘‘bhagavā’’ti saddasiddhi niruttinayena veditabbā.
144 虽然以‘bhāgyavā’等词所表达的含义已摄入‘bhagī bhajī’的释义偈颂中,但词的形成、义项区分、义理联结等注释方法仍有不同,故说‘此是另一种方法’。‘Ādi’一词,通过‘ādi’这个字,包含音变、音省略以及依词根含义而结合这三种特征。‘Saddanayenāti’即依语法的方法。由于‘pisodara’等词属于不规则类,故说‘取pisodarādi类的特征’。纳入该类即是‘pakkhipana’,故说那特征就是‘pakkhipana’。‘Pārappatta’指达到最胜、成就波罗蜜的状态。‘Bhāgyanti’指善。其中,道所摄的善能产生出世间乐,其他的善能产生世间乐;或者,其他的善若成为解脱的资粮,也可间接地产生出世间乐。显示巴利原文
144. Yadipi ‘‘bhāgyavā’’tiādīhi padehi vuccamāno attho ‘‘bhagī bhajī’’ti niddesagāthāya saṅgahito eva, tathāpi padasiddhi atthavibhāgaatthayojanādisahito saṃvaṇṇanānayo tato aññākāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ pana aparo nayo’’ti. Ādikanti ādi-saddena vaṇṇavikāro , vaṇṇalopo, dhātuatthena niyojanañcāti imaṃ tividhaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Saddanayenāti byākaraṇanayena. Pisodarādīnaṃ saddānaṃ ākatigaṇabhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘pisodarādipakkhepalakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā’’ti. Pakkhipanameva lakkhaṇaṃ. Tappariyāpannatākaraṇaṃ hi pakkhipanaṃ. Pārappattanti paramukkaṃsagataṃ pāramibhāvappattaṃ. Bhāgyanti kusalaṃ. Tattha maggakusalaṃ lokuttarasukhanibbattakaṃ, itaraṃ lokiyasukhanibbattakaṃ, itarampi vā vivaṭṭūpanissayaṃ pariyāyato lokuttarasukhanibbattakaṃ siyā.
贪等是以单独一项的方式被摄取的。同样,颠倒作意是以颠倒的共同本质而被摄取,无惭等是以二项的方式。而贪等又以‘三种不善根’的方式以三项被摄取。身恶行等、渴爱杂染等、贪垢等、贪不平等、欲想等、欲思惟等、渴爱戏论等,是三种恶行等。净想等是四种颠倒。‘或因比丘的衣服而生起渴爱,或因饮食、住所、如此或如彼的生存之因而生起’(增支部4.9),如此所说的四种渴爱之生起。‘于佛疑惑,于法,于僧,于学处,于同梵行者忿怒、不悦、心受打击、心生障碍’(长部3.319等),如此所说的五种心之障碍。‘于欲未离贪,于身未离贪,于色未离贪,尽情饱食后沉溺于床乐、触乐、睡眠乐而住,为求生某一天众而修梵行’(长部3.320等),如此所说的五种系缚。色之欢喜等是五种欢喜。忿、覆、嫉、诳、恶欲、执取己见,这些是六种争论之根。色渴爱等是六种渴爱之身。显示巴利原文
Lobhādayo ekakavasena gahitā. Tathā viparītamanasikāro vipallāsabhāvasāmaññena, ahirikādayo dukavasena. Lobhādayo ca puna ‘‘tividhākusalamūla’’nti tikavasena gahitā. Kāyaduccaritādi-taṇhāsaṃkilesādirāgamalādirāgavisamādikāmasaññādikāmavitakkāditaṇhāpapañcādayo tividhaduccaritādayo. Subhasaññādikā catubbidhavipariyesā. ‘‘Cīvarahetu vā bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, piṇḍapāta , senāsana, itibhavābhavahetu vā’’ti (a. ni. 4.9) evamāgatā cattāro taṇhuppādā. ‘‘Buddhe kaṅkhati, dhamme, saṅghe, sikkhāya, sabrahmacārīsu kupito hoti anattamano āhatacitto khīlajāto’’ti (dī. ni. 3.319; ma. ni. 1.185; a. ni. 5.205; 9.71; vibha. 941) evamāgatāni pañca cetokhīlāni. ‘‘Kāme avītarāgo hoti, kāye avītarāgo, rūpe avītarāgo, yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ passasukhaṃ middhasukhaṃ anuyutto viharati, aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ caratī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.320; ma. ni. 1.186) āgatā pañca vinibandhā. Rūpābhinandanādayo pañcābhinandanā. Kodho, makkho, issā, sāṭheyyaṃ, pāpicchatā, sandiṭṭhiparāmāsoti imāni cha vivādamūlāni. Rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā.
欲贪、嗔恚、见、疑、有贪、慢、无明是七种随眠。邪见等是八种邪性。‘缘于渴爱而有寻求,缘于寻求而有获得,缘于获得而有分别,缘于分别而有欲贪,缘于欲贪而有执取,缘于执取而有持有,缘于持有而有悭吝,缘于悭吝而有守护,以守护为因而有执杖等’(长部2.103; 3.359),这些是九种以渴爱为根本的法。四种常见论、四种一分常见论、四种有边无边论、四种诡辩论、二种无因生论、十六种有想论、八种无想论、八种非有想非无想论、七种断灭论、五种现法涅槃论,这些是六十二种邪见。依内在而有‘我是’、‘我是如此’、‘我是这样’、‘我是别样’、‘我将是’、‘我将是如此’、‘我将是这样’、‘我将是别样’、‘愿我是’、‘愿我是如此’、‘愿我是这样’、‘愿我是别样’、‘我当有’、‘我当如此有’、‘我当这样有’、‘我当别样有’等十八种;依外在而有‘以此我是’、‘以此我是如此’、‘以此我是这样’、‘以此我是别样’等(分别论975-976)所说的十八种,共三十六种;过去三十六种、未来三十六种、现在三十六种,共一百零八种渴爱行。显示巴利原文
Kāmarāgapaṭighadiṭṭhivicikicchābhavarāgamānāvijjā sattānusayā. Micchādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha micchattā. ‘‘Taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho, lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo, vinicchayaṃ paṭicca chandarāgo, chandarāgaṃ paṭicca ajjhosānaṃ, ajjhosānaṃ paṭicca pariggaho, pariggahaṃ paṭicca macchariyaṃ, macchariyaṃ paṭicca ārakkhā, ārakkhādhikaraṇaṃ daṇḍādānādayo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.103; 3.359) ete nava taṇhāmūlakā. Cattāro sassatavādā, cattāro ekaccasassatavādā, cattāro antānantikā, cattāro amarāvikkhepikā, dve adhiccasamuppannikā, soḷasa saññīvādā, aṭṭha asaññīvādā, aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā , satta ucchedavādā, pañca paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti etāni dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni. Ajjhattikassa upādāya ‘‘asmī’’ti hoti, ‘‘itthasmī’’ti, ‘‘evasmī’’ti, ‘‘aññathāsmī’’ti, ‘‘bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘itthaṃ bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘evaṃ bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘aññathā bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘asasmī’’ti, ‘‘sātasmī’’ti, ‘‘siya’’nti, ‘‘itthaṃ siya’’nti, ‘‘evaṃ siya’’nti, ‘‘aññathā siya’’nti, ‘‘apāhaṃ siya’’nti, ‘‘apāhaṃ itthaṃ siya’’nti, ‘‘apāhaṃ evaṃ siya’’nti, ‘‘apāhaṃ aññathā siya’’nti hotīti aṭṭhārasa, bāhirassupādāya ‘‘iminā asmī’’ti hoti, ‘‘iminā itthasmī’’ti, ‘‘iminā evasmī’’ti, ‘‘iminā aññathāsmī’’tiādikā (vibha. 975-976) vuttanayā aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa, atītā chattiṃsa, anāgatā chattiṃsa, paccuppannā chattiṃsāti aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni.
“差别”一词应各自连接。此处连接如下:贪的差别、嗔的差别……乃至一百零八种渴爱行的差别。其连接为:世尊摧破了众生所有产生苦恼与焦热的烦恼——那无数百千种烦恼。因为烦恼依所缘等差别,依转起行相差别,有无量种类。简略而言:于此,以彻底断除、令不复生的方式摧破烦恼魔;以断除集、遍知的方式摧破蕴魔;以令其无侣、令其全然不生起的方式摧破行魔;以摧破其威势力、超越其领域的方式摧破天子魔与死魔。“灾祸”一词指灾祸。由于对众生现世与来世带来不利,以杀害义、恼害义,烦恼本身即魔,故为烦恼魔。以杀戮义,蕴本身即魔,故为蕴魔。正如所说:“不如实了知杀戮之色为‘杀戮之色’”等(相应部3.85)。由于产生生、老等大灾祸,行本身即魔,故为行魔。以成为杂染之相、以杀害功德义,天子本身即魔,故为天子魔。由于令众生的寿命与生活资具损耗,成为大障碍之相,死本身即魔,故为死魔。显示巴利原文
Pabheda-saddo paccekaṃ sambandhitabbo. Tatthāyaṃ yojanā – lobhappabhedā dosappabhedā yāva aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritappabhedāti. Sabbāni sattānaṃ darathapariḷāhakarāni kilesānaṃ anekāni satasahassāni abhañjīti yojanā. Ārammaṇādivibhāgato hi pavattiākāravibhāgato ca anantappabhedā kilesāti. Saṅkhepatoti ettha samucchedappahānavasena sabbaso appavattikaraṇena kilesamāraṃ, samudayappahānapariññāvasena khandhamāraṃ, sahāyavekallakaraṇavasena sabbathā appavattikaraṇena abhisaṅkhāramāraṃ, balavidhamanavisayātikkamanavasena devaputtamaccumārañca abhañji bhagge akāsi. Parissayānanti upaddavānaṃ. Sampati, āyatiñca sattānaṃ anatthāvahattā māraṇaṭṭhena vibādhanaṭṭhena kilesāva māroti kilesamāro. Vadhakaṭṭhena khandhāva māroti khandhamāro. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘vadhakaṃ rūpaṃ ‘vadhakaṃ rūpa’nti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.85). Jātijarādimahābyasananibbattanena abhisaṅkhārova māroti abhisaṅkhāramāro. Saṃkilesanimittaṃ hutvā guṇamāraṇaṭṭhena devaputtova māroti devaputtamāro. Sattānaṃ jīvitassa, jīvitaparikkhārānañca jānikaraṇena mahābādharūpattā maccu eva māroti maccumāro.
“具足百福相者”:由无数百福所生的大人相之承载者,此说明其色身成就,因为那是其余果德成就的根本与依止处。也说明了法身成就,因为智成就等是以断成就为前提的。由于具足福德,为世间所尊重;由于已断除过患,为审察者们所尊重,这是句子的连接。如此,此后诸句也当依次第连接。因具福德,在家众如刹帝利等前来亲近;因已断除过患,出家者、苦行者、游行者等前来亲近,思惟“他为调伏过患而说法”。对于这些前来亲近者,他具有以财施与法施息除他们身心之苦的能力,因为存在着财施与法施的利益。以净色眼见到他的色身,以智慧眼见到他的法身之后,由于两种苦的止息,以及他对于前来亲近者以财施与法施作利益,并通过“过去我以财施与法施证得此世间最胜地位,故你们亦应如此行道”的方式,于正行道上的劝勉,也说明了他具有以世间与出世间之乐摄受前来亲近者的能力。显示巴利原文
Satapuññalakkhaṇadharassāti anekasatapuññanibbattamahāpurisalakkhaṇavahato rūpakāyasampatti dīpitā hoti, itarāsaṃ phalasampadānaṃ mūlabhāvato, adhiṭṭhānabhāvato ca. Dhammakāyasampatti dīpitā hoti, pahānasampadāpubbakattā ñāṇasampadādīnaṃ. Bhāgyavatāya lokiyānaṃ bahumatabhāvo. Bhaggadosatāya parikkhakānaṃ bahumatabhāvoti yojanā. Evaṃ ito paresupi yathāsaṅkhyaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Puññavantaṃ hi gahaṭṭhā khattiyādayo abhigacchanti, pahīnadosaṃ pabbajitatāpasaparibbājakādayo ‘‘dosavinayāya dhammaṃ desetī’’ti. Abhigatānañca nesaṃ kāyacittadukkhāpanayane paṭibalabhāvo, āmisadānadhammadānehi upakārasabbhāvato. Rūpakāyaṃ tassa pasādacakkhunā, dhammakāyaṃ paññācakkhunā disvā dukkhadvayassa paṭippassambhanato upagatānañca tesaṃ āmisadānadhammadānehi upakāritā, ‘‘pubbe āmisadānadhammadānehi mayā ayaṃ lokaggabhāvo adhigato, tasmā tumhehipi evameva paṭipajjitabba’’nti evaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ niyojanena abhigatānaṃ lokiyalokuttarasukhehi saṃyojanasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti.
“于自心得自在”:令自心达到自在支配的状态,由此成就于厌恶等处修习不厌恶想等住法,以及决意神变等神变种类;这也因修心达自在而成就,故也是心自在。“缩小、轻快等”:以“等”字摄取了广大、到达、自在、支配、所欲成就这六种。其中,令身微细为“缩小”;令身轻快,如于空中以足行走等,为“轻快”;令身广大,为“广大”;到达所欲之处,为“到达”;以决意等方式成就所欲,为“所作”;于自身得自在、有主宰力,为“自在”;于神变种类得自在,为“支配”;或于空中行走,或做任何其他事时,于任何处达到究竟,为“所欲成就”。也有说“示现童子形等”。如此,这便是世间共许的八种自在。然而,世尊的这种自在包含于神变种类中,且不与其他共通,故说“具足一切行相圆满”。显示巴利原文
Sakacitte issariyaṃ attano cittassa vasībhāvāpādanaṃ, yena paṭikkūlādīsu appaṭikkūlasaññitādivihārasiddhi, adhiṭṭhāniddhiādiko iddhividhopi cittissariyameva cittabhāvanāya vasībhāvappattiyā ijjhanato. Aṇimālaghimādikanti ādi-saddena mahimā patti pākammaṃ īsitā vasitā yatthakāmāvasāyitāti ime chapi saṅgahitā. Tattha kāyassa aṇubhāvakaraṇaṃ aṇimā. Lahubhāvo laghimā ākāse padasā gamanādinā. Mahattaṃ mahimā kāyassa mahantatāpādanaṃ. Iṭṭhadesappatti patti. Adhiṭṭhānādivasena icchitanipphādanaṃ pākammaṃ. Sayaṃvasitā issarabhāvo īsitā. Iddhividhe vasībhāvo vasitā. Ākāsena vā gacchato, aññaṃ vā kiñci karoto yattha katthaci vosānappatti yatthakāmāvasāyitā. ‘‘Kumārakarūpādidassana’’ntipi vadanti. Evamidaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ lokiyasammataṃ issariyaṃ. Taṃ pana bhagavato iddhividhantogadhaṃ, anaññasādhāraṇañcāti āha ‘‘sabbākāraparipūraṃ atthī’’ti.
有些人名声局限而不清净,因为依托于不实的功德,而如来并非如此。为显明此义,故说“遍满三界”等。其中,在此证得导师功德者,以及生于无色界者,以“彼世尊即是……”等方式随念世尊功德时,其名声显扬,所以说“遍满三界”。正因为证得真实的功德,故极为清净。由于无余相好等悉皆具足,故一切行相圆满。“一切肢节庄严”:一切大小肢体的光辉。“已度者令度”等:这世间怙主以心与语之愿所希求者,以身之愿所期望者,都如其愿而成就,即与愿相应。已达精进巴拉密,且属于圣道的正精进,称为“精勤”。显示巴利原文
Kesañci padesavutti, ayathābhūtaguṇasannissayattā aparisuddho ca yaso hoti, na evaṃ tathāgatassāti dassetuṃ ‘‘lokattayabyāpako’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idha adhigatasatthuguṇānaṃ āruppe uppannānaṃ ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā bhagavato guṇe anussarantānaṃ yaso pākaṭo hotīti āha ‘‘lokattayabyāpako’’ti. Yathābhuccaguṇādhigatattā eva ativiya parisuddho. Anavasesalakkhaṇānubyañjanādisampattiyā sabbākāraparipūrā. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅgasirī sabbesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ sobhā. ‘‘Tiṇṇo tāreyya’’ntiādinā yaṃ yaṃ etena lokanāthena icchitaṃ manovacīpaṇidhānavasena, patthitaṃ kāyapaṇidhānavasena. Tathevāti paṇidhānānurūpameva. Vīriyapāramibhāvappatto, ariyamaggapariyāpanno ca sammāvāyāmasaṅkhāto payatto.
“以分别”:以结合一切三法、二法句的种种分别。以“缘起等”的“等”字,应知不仅含括《分别论》中所出的念处等,而且含括摄等、时解脱等、安立等、三法发趣等。苦谛的逼迫义:对具苦者的伤害,令不自在。有为义:由因缘和合、共同生起而成就的状态。热恼义:以苦苦等而热恼、焚烧。变易义:依老与死两种方式变易。集谛的集起义:作为生起苦的方式而积集。因缘义:如同安立者般,令“此是苦”生起。结缚义:与轮回之苦结合、捆绑。障碍义:障碍道的证得。灭谛的出离义:由于舍弃一切依着之自性而从中出离,或为出离之因。远离义:不与一切行相结合。无为义:不由任何因缘所造作。不死义:因恒常自性而无死,或为众生不死之因。道谛的出离义:从轮回之苦出离之义。因义:导向涅槃的状态。见义:对极微细涅槃的证悟。增上义:于观四谛中,对相应法作增上;或特就道增上而说,为所缘增上。因为禅那等虽也有所缘增上,却不曾说“禅那增上法”等,唯说“道增上法”,故知“道于所缘增上有殊胜处”。这些逼迫等称为十六行相。然而,为何在此……显示巴利原文
Bhedehīti sabbattikadukapadasaṃhitehi pabhedehi. Paṭiccasamuppādādīhīti ādi-saddena na kevalaṃ vibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ āgatā satipaṭṭhānādayova saṅgahitā, atha kho saṅgahādayo, samayavimuttādayo, ṭhapanādayo , tikapaṭṭhānādayo ca saṅgahitāti veditabbaṃ. Dukkhasaccassa pīḷanaṭṭho taṃsamaṅgino sattassa hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ. Saṅkhataṭṭho sameccasambhūyapaccayehi katabhāvo. Santāpaṭṭho dukkhadukkhatādīhi santappanaṃ paridahanaṃ. Vipariṇāmaṭṭho jarāya, maraṇena cāti dvidhā vipariṇāmetabbatā. Samudayassa āyūhanaṭṭho dukkhassa nibbattanavasena sampiṇḍanaṃ. Nidānaṭṭho ‘‘idaṃ taṃ dukkha’’nti nidadantassa viya samuṭṭhāpanaṃ. Saṃyogaṭṭho saṃsāradukkhena saṃyojanaṃ. Palibodhaṭṭho maggādhigamassa nivāraṇaṃ. Nirodhassa nissaraṇaṭṭho sabbūpadhīnaṃ paṭinissaggasabhāvattā tato vinissaṭatā, tannissaraṇanimittatā vā. Vivekaṭṭho sabbasaṅkhāravisaṃyuttatā. Asaṅkhataṭṭho kenacipi paccayena anabhisaṅkhatatā. Amataṭṭho niccasabhāvattā maraṇābhāvo, sattānaṃ maraṇābhāvahetutā vā. Maggassa niyyānaṭṭho vaṭṭadukkhato niggamanaṭṭho. Hetuattho nibbānassa sampāpakabhāvo. Dassanaṭṭho accantasukhumassa nibbānassa sacchikaraṇaṃ. Ādhipateyyaṭṭho catusaccadassane sampayuttānaṃ ādhipaccakaraṇaṃ, ārammaṇādhipatibhāvo vā visesato maggādhipativacanato. Satipi hi jhānādīnaṃ ārammaṇādhipatibhāve ‘‘jhānādhipatino dhammā’’ti evamādiṃ avatvā ‘‘maggādhipatino dhammā’’ icceva vuttaṃ, tasmā viññāyati ‘‘atthi maggassa ārammaṇādhipatibhāve viseso’’ti. Ete ca pīḷanādayo soḷasākārā nāma. Kasmā panettha aññesu rogagaṇṭhādiākāresu vijjamānesu eteva pariggayhantīti? Salakkhaṇato ca saccantaradassanato ca āvibhāvato. Svāyamattho parato saccakathāyameva āvi bhavissati.
天住:以地遍等为所缘的色界禅那。慈等禅那为梵住。果等至为圣住。由离欲而身远离,成就专一的状态,是身远离。以初禅等远离诸盖,令心远离,是心远离。依远离即涅槃。其他:指世间神通等。显示巴利原文
Dibbavihāro kasiṇādiārammaṇāni rūpāvacarajjhānāni. Mettādijjhānāni brahmavihāro. Phalasamāpatti ariyavihāro. Kāmehi vivekaṭṭhakāyatāvasena ekībhāvo kāyaviveko. Paṭhamajjhānādinā nīvaraṇādīhi vivittacittatā cittaviveko. Upadhiviveko nibbānaṃ. Aññeti lokiyābhiññādike.
以烦恼与行为动力,于诸有中流转,而此中以渴爱为主导,故说为“称为渴爱的行”。已吐出:以圣道之口吐出,以不再吞回的方式彻底舍弃。为显示“世尊”是依词源论而称,故说“如同……腰带”。显示巴利原文
Kilesābhisaṅkhāravasena bhavesu paribbhamanaṃ, so ca taṇhāppadhānoti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ gamana’’nti. Vantanti ariyamaggamukhena uggiritaṃ puna apaccāvamanavasena chaḍḍitaṃ. Bhagavāti vuccati niruttinayenāti dassento āha ‘‘yathā…pe… mekhalā’’ti.
另一种解释:具福分故,为世尊;已受用故,为世尊;于福分中行故,为世尊;于诸福中行故,为世尊;已食故,为世尊;于诸福中吐出故,为世尊。于福分中吐出故,为世尊。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – bhāgavāti bhagavā, bhatavāti bhagavā, bhāge vanīti bhagavā, bhage vanīti bhagavā, bhattavāti bhagavā, bhage vamīti bhagavā. Bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
具福分者、已受用者、于福分中行者、于诸福中行者、已食者;
于诸德分中已舍弃者,如是,胜者被称为世尊。
显示巴利原文 Bhāgavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino.
其中,如何以‘拥有诸德之分’而称为世尊?戒等法蕴、功德分,如来皆拥有、可证得,不共他者,无上无等。如此,他的戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见;惭、愧;信、精进;念、正知;戒清净、见清净;止、观;三善根、三善行、三正思惟、三无过想、三界;四念处、四正勤、四神足、四圣道、四圣果、四无碍解、四胎藏判别智、四圣种、四无畏智;五勤支、五支正定、五智正定、五根、五力、五出离界、五解脱处智、五解脱成熟想;六随念处、六恭敬、六出离界、六常住处、六无上、六决择分想、六神通、六不共智;七不退法、七圣法、七圣财、七觉支、七善士法、七磨灭事、七想、七应施人施设、七识住施设、七漏尽力施设;八得慧因施设、八正性、八世间法超越、八发勤事、八非时施设、八大人思惟、八胜处施设、八解脱;九如理作意根本法、九遍净勤支、九有情居施设、九嗔恚调伏、九想、九种种、九次第住;十救护因法、十遍处、十善业道、十正性、十圣居、十无学法、十如来力;十一慈心功德、十二法轮相、十三头陀功德、十四佛智、十五解脱成熟法、十六种入出息念。显示巴利原文
Tattha kathaṃ bhāgavāti bhagavā? Ye te sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā guṇakoṭṭhāsā, te anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā tathāgatassa atthi upalabbhanti. Tathā hissa sīlaṃ samādhi paññā vimutti vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ, hirī ottappaṃ, saddhā vīriyaṃ, sati sampajaññaṃ, sīlavisuddhi diṭṭhivisuddhi, samatho vipassanā, tīṇi kusalamūlāni, tīṇi sucaritāni, tayo sammāvitakkā, tisso anavajjasaññā, tisso dhātuyo, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, cattāro ariyamaggā, cattāri ariyaphalāni, catasso paṭisambhidā, catuyoniparicchedakañāṇāni, cattāro ariyavaṃsā, cattāri vesārajjañāṇāni, pañca padhāniyaṅgāni, pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi, pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhi, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, pañca nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, pañca vimuttāyatanañāṇāni, pañca vimuttiparipācanīyā saññā, cha anussatiṭṭhānāni, cha gāravā, cha nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, cha satatavihārā, cha anuttariyāni, cha nibbedhabhāgiyā saññā, cha abhiññā, cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni, satta aparihāniyā dhammā, satta ariyadhammā, satta ariyadhanāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, satta sappurisadhammā, satta nijjaravatthūni, satta saññā, sattadakkhiṇeyyapuggaladesanā, sattaviññāṇaṭṭhitidesanā, sattakhīṇāsavabaladesanā, aṭṭhapaññāpaṭilābhahetudesanā, aṭṭha sammattāni, aṭṭhalokadhammātikkamā, aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni, aṭṭhaakkhaṇadesanā, aṭṭha mahāpurisavitakkā, aṭṭhaabhibhāyatanadesanā, aṭṭha vimokkhā, nava yonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā, nava pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgāni, navasattāvāsadesanā, nava āghātapaṭivinayā, nava saññā, nava nānattā, nava anupubbavihārā, dasa nāthakāraṇā dhammā, dasa kasiṇāyatanāni, dasa kusalakammapathā, dasa sammattāni, dasa ariyavāsā, dasa asekkhadhammā, dasa tathāgatabalāni, ekādasa mettānisaṃsā, dvādasa dhammacakkākārā, terasa dhutaguṇā, cuddasa buddhañāṇāni, pañcadasa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā, soḷasavidhā ānāpānassati, soḷasa aparantapanīyā dhammā, aṭṭhārasa buddhadhammā, ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni, catucattālīsa ñāṇavatthūni , paññāsa udayabbayañāṇāni, paropaññāsa kusaladhammā, sattasattatiñāṇavatthūni, catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasamāpattisañcārimahāvajirañāṇaṃ, anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānapavicayapaccavekkhaṇadesanāñāṇāni, tathā anantāsu lokadhātūsu anantānaṃ sattānaṃ āsayādivibhāvanañāṇāni cāti evamādayo anantāparimāṇabhedā anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā guṇabhāgā guṇakoṭṭhāsā saṃvijjanti upalabbhanti. Tasmā yathāvuttavibhāgā guṇabhāgā assa atthīti bhāgavāti vattabbe ā-kārassa rassattaṃ katvā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vutto. Evaṃ tāva bhāgavāti bhagavā.
因戒等一切功德分,悉皆无余;
诸功德住于善逝,故称为“世尊”。
显示巴利原文 Yasmā sīlādayo sabbe, guṇabhāgā asesato; Vijjanti sugate tasmā, ‘‘bhagavā’’ti pavuccati.
如何以“已拥有者”之义称为世尊?彼为利益一切世间而发起精勤,将人趣等八法集聚后,于正等觉立下大愿,圆满大菩萨所应修足的布施巴拉密、持戒巴拉密、出离巴拉密、智慧巴拉密、精进巴拉密、忍耐巴拉密、真实巴拉密、决意波罗蜜、慈爱巴拉密、舍巴拉密——此即十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十最上波罗蜜,合为三十波罗蜜;及布施等四摄事,真实等四决意;自我弃舍、弃眼、弃财、弃国、弃妻儿,为五大舍;前际修行、前际行、说法、利亲友行、利世间行、利佛行等;或总略而言,一切福德资粮、智慧资粮、成佛之法,从大愿始,于四不可计数又十万劫中,不成为退堕分、杂染分或止住分,唯成上上殊胜分,如是殷重、无间、无余地已被拥有、已被完全拥有,故应名“bhatavā”,依语法转t为g而称为“bhagavā”。又,“bhatavā”之义:他依所说方式,承载、完全承载、圆满了他们成佛之法。如此,亦以“已拥有者”之义而称世尊。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhatavāti bhagavā? Ye te sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannehi manussattādike aṭṭha dhamme samodhānetvā sammāsambodhiyā katamahābhinīhārehi mahābodhisattehi paripūretabbā dānapāramī, sīlanekkhammapaññāvīriyakhantisaccaadhiṭṭhānamettāupekkhāpāramīti dasa pāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsa pāramiyo, dānādīni cattāri saṅgahavatthūni, saccādīni cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni, attapariccāgo, nayana, dhana, rajja, puttadārapariccāgoti pañca mahāpariccāgā, pubbayogo, pubbacariyā, dhammakkhānaṃ, ñātatthacariyā, lokatthacariyā, buddhatthacariyāti evamādayo, saṅkhepato vā sabbe puññasambhārañāṇasambhārabuddhakārakadhammā, te mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya kappānaṃ satasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyāni yathā hānabhāgiyā, saṃkilesabhāgiyā, ṭhitibhāgiyā vā na honti, atha kho uttaruttari visesabhāgiyāva honti, evaṃ sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ anavasesato bhatā sambhatā assa atthīti bhatavāti vattabbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vutto niruttinayena ta-kārassa ga-kāraṃ katvā. Atha vā bhatavāti teyeva yathāvutte buddhakārakadhamme vuttanayena bhari sambhari, paripūresīti attho. Evampi bhatavāti bhagavā.
为证正等觉,圆满一切布施巴拉密等法;
资粮具足者即为依怙,由此故,世尊被认定为怙主。
显示巴利原文 Sammāsambodhiyā sabbe, dānapāramiādike; Sambhāre bhatavā nātho, tasmāpi bhagavā mato.
世尊何以称为“护持分者”?那些每日受用的等至分,数量计有二十四万亿,他为利益世间及自己的现法乐住,恒常不息地护持、亲近、修习、多作于这些至分,因此世尊称为“护持分者”。或者,在应证知之法、善法等、蕴等之中,有以应遍知等方式略说的四种现观分,广说则如“眼应遍知……乃至老死应遍知”等,有种种应遍知分;如“眼之集应断……乃至老死之集应断”等,有应断分;如“眼之灭应作证……乃至老死之灭应作证”等,有应作证分;如“眼灭之道”等,以及“四念处”等,有种种差别的应修习分。对于这一切法,他依所宜,以行境修习与亲近的方式而护持、亲近。如此,世尊也称为“护持分者”。或者,那些戒等法蕴,是与弟子们共通的功德部分、功德分,他以大悲心护持、希求:“如何能令这些功德分安立于应调伏者的相续中呢?”而他的这个希求,成就了如其所愿之果。如此,世尊也称为“护持分者”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhāge vanīti bhagavā? Ye te catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhā devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakasamāpattibhāgā, te anavasesato lokahitatthaṃ, attano ca diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ niccakappaṃ niccakappaṃ vani bhaji sevi bahulamakāsīti bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā abhiññeyyadhammesu, kusalādīsu, khandhādīsu ca ye te pariññeyyādivasena saṅkhepato vā catubbidhā abhisamayabhāgā, vitthārato pana ‘‘cakkhuṃ pariññeyyaṃ…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ pariññeyya’’ntiādinā anekapariññeyyabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa samudayo pahātabbo…pe… jarāmaraṇassa samudayo pahātabbo’’tiādinā pahātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodho…pe… jarāmaraṇassa nirodho sacchikātabbo’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.21) sacchikātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’tiādinā, ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā ca anekabhedā bhāvetabbabhāgā ca dhammā, te sabbe vani bhaji yathārahaṃ gocarabhāvanāsevanānaṃ vasena sevi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā ye ime sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā sāvakehi sādhāraṇā guṇakoṭṭhāsā guṇabhāgā, ‘‘kinti nu kho te veneyyasantānesu patiṭṭhapeyya’’nti mahākaruṇāya vani abhipatthayi, sā cassa abhipatthanā yathādhippetaphalāvahā ahosi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā.
由于如来于所知、等至、功德分,具足故为依怙,故称世尊。
显示巴利原文 Yasmā ñeyyasamāpatti-guṇabhāge tathāgato; Bhaji patthayi sattānaṃ, hitāya bhagavā tato.
世尊何以称为“护持幸福”?略而言之:由已作功德、具备加行的人随其能力所受用、所亲近者,名为“幸福”,即世间与出世间的成就。其中,就世间而言,如来在成正觉之前,身为菩萨,于最极增上的幸福中护持、亲近、修习,依此而无余地成就诸成佛之法,圆熟了佛法。至成佛之后,亦于那些无过失、带来安乐、不与其他众生共通的出世间幸福中,护持、亲近、修习。广而言之,则以地方王权、自在、转轮王成就、天王成就等,以及禅那、解脱、定、等至、智见、道之修习、果之作证等上人法,于种种不与其他众生共通的幸福中,护持、亲近、修习。如是,世尊亦称为“护持幸福”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhage vanīti bhagavā? Samāsato tāva katapuññehi payogasampannehi yathāvibhavaṃ bhajīyantīti bhagā, lokiyalokuttarasampattiyo. Tattha lokiye tāva tathāgato sambodhito pubbe bodhisattabhūto paramukkaṃsagate vani bhaji sevi, yattha patiṭṭhāya niravasesato buddhakārakadhamme samannānento buddhadhamme paripācesi. Buddhabhūto pana te niravajjasukhūpasaṃhite anaññasādhāraṇe lokuttarepi vani bhaji sevi. Vitthārato pana padesarajjaissariyacakkavattisampattidevarajjasampattiādivasena, jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattiñāṇadassanamaggabhāvanāphalasacchikiriyādiuttarimanussadhammavasena ca anekavihite anaññasādhāraṇe bhage vani bhaji sevi. Evampi bhage vanīti bhagavā.
世间种种成就,以及出世间众多成就,
正自觉者护持了这一切,由此也被称为世尊。
显示巴利原文 Yā tā sampattiyo loke, yā ca lokuttarā puthū; Sabbā tā bhaji sambuddho, tasmāpi bhagavā mato.
何以称世尊为“有恭敬者”?“有恭敬者”意为:他拥有众多恭敬坚固的弟子。如来具足大悲、一切知智等无量、无与伦比的威德殊胜功德,故为一切众生中最上者;他以先除一切不利为前导,毫无遗漏地施设利益与安乐,以无上的修行成就,对含括天、人在内的众生行最上饶益;他成就了三十二大丈夫相、八十随形好、身光一寻等不与其他人共通的殊胜功德所庄严的色身;他具足由真实功德所证得、依“彼世尊即是如此”等方式流布、遍满三界、广大且极清净的称扬之声;他善住于少欲、知足等达至极处的最上彼岸者之中;他具足十力、四无畏等无上殊胜功德;于“信色量者、信声量者、信粗量者、信法量者”这四种量度的世间众生中,能以一切方式令其生信,故为全然清净。因此,他成为无数天、人等众所恭敬、尊重、崇敬的对象,是最上爱敬与亲近之处。那些安住于他的教诫、具有证净者,不会被任何沙门、婆罗门、天、魔、梵天等所动摇,他们的亲近恭敬正是如此。正如他们纵然舍弃自己的生命,也绝不会舍弃对彼的净信,或对彼教令的坚固恭敬。因此他说:显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā? Bhattā daḷhabhattikā assa bahū atthīti bhattavā. Tathāgato hi mahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādiaparimitanirupamappabhāvaguṇavisesasamaṅgi bhāvato sabbasattuttamo sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaasītianubyañjanabyāmappabhādianaññasādhāraṇaguṇavisesapaṭimaṇḍitarūpakāyatāya yathābhuccaguṇādhigatena ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinayappavattena lokattayabyāpināsuvipulena, suvisuddhena ca thutighosena samannāgatattā, ukkaṃsapāramippattāsu appicchatāsantuṭṭhiādīsu supatiṭṭhitabhāvato, dasabalacatuvesārajjādiniratisayaguṇavisesasamaṅgibhāvato ca ‘‘rūpappamāṇo rūpappasanno, ghosappamāṇo ghosappasanno, lūkhappamāṇo lūkhappasanno, dhammappamāṇo dhammappasanno’’ti evaṃ catuppamāṇike lokasannivāse sabbathāpi pasādāvahabhāvena samantapāsādikattā aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ sadevamanussānaṃ ādarabahumānagāravāyatanatāya paramapemasambhattiṭṭhānaṃ. Ye tassa ovāde patiṭṭhitā aveccappasādena samannāgatā honti, kenaci asaṃhāriyā tesaṃ sambhatti samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vāti. Tathā hi te attano jīvitapariccāgepi tattha pasādaṃ na pariccajanti, tassa vā āṇaṃ daḷhabhattibhāvato. Tenevāha –
‘‘Yo ve kataññū katavedi dhīro, Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hotī’’ti. (jā. 2.17.78);
诸比丘,譬如大海安住于法,不越海岸;同样,诸比丘,我为弟子们所制定的学处,我的弟子们即使为了活命也不会违越。显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi , bhikkhave, mahāsamuddo ṭhitadhammo velaṃ nātivattati, evameva kho, bhikkhave, yaṃ mayā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ mama sāvakā jīvitahetupi nātikkamantī’’ti (udā. 45; cūḷava. 385) ca.
如此,世尊被称作“有恭敬者”,这是依语法规则省略一个“t”音并将另一个变为“g”音的缘故。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā niruttinayena ekassa ta-kārassa lopaṃ katvā itarassa ga-kāraṃ katvā.
利益世间者,具足殊胜功德;
众多弟子恭敬亲近此导师,因此被称为世尊。
显示巴利原文 Guṇātisayayuttassa , yasmā lokahitesino; Sambhattā bahavo satthu, bhagavā tena vuccati.
为何说“于世福已吐”而称世尊?因为如来在还是菩萨之时,于往昔诸生中圆满波罗蜜,便已将称为福份的祥瑞、自在与名声吐出、抛弃,如吐弃唾沫一般毫无顾念。例如在苏摩那萨童子时、护象童子时、铁屋智者时、默护智者时、小善生时等,为了圆满出离巴拉密,他舍弃了与天王统治相当的王国祥瑞,所舍身躯不可计量。即便在最后一生,对于那唾手可得、与天界主宰相当的转轮王祥瑞、四洲自在,以及依止于转轮成就、闪耀七宝的名声,他也视如草芥,无有顾念地舍弃,出家之后,证悟了正等正觉。因此,由于舍弃了这些祥瑞等福份,故称世尊为“于世福已吐者”。或者,称为“宿”的星宿,与它们一同运行、转起,是为“有宿者”,即依止于须弥山、持轴山、北俱卢洲与雪山等器世间殊胜处的光辉,因其能持续一劫之久。世尊也舍弃了这些,因为通过断除与之相关的欲贪,他超越了居住其中的众生及其居所。如此,世尊也因舍弃了福份而被称为“于世福已吐者”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhage vamīti bhagavā? Yasmā tathāgato bodhisattabhūtopi purimāsu jātīsu pāramiyo pūrento bhagasaṅkhātaṃ siriṃ, issariyaṃ, yasañca vami uggiri kheḷapiṇḍaṃ viya anapekkho chaḍḍayi. Tathā hissa somanassakumārakāle (jā. 1.15.211 ādayo) hatthipālakumārakāle (jā. 1.15.337 ādayo) ayogharapaṇḍitakāle (jā. 1.15.363 ādayo) mūgapakkhapaṇḍitakāle (jā. 2.22.1 ādayo) cūḷasutasomakāleti (jā. 2.17.195 ādayo) evamādīsu nekkhammapāramipūraṇavasena devarajjasadisāya rajjasiriyā pariccattaattabhāvānaṃ parimāṇaṃ natthi. Carimattabhāvepi hatthagataṃ cakkavattisiriṃ devalokādhipaccasadisaṃ catudīpissariyaṃ, cakkavattisampattisannissayaṃ sattaratanasamujjalaṃ yasañca tiṇāyapi amaññamāno nirapekkho pahāya abhinikkhamitvā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tasmā ime siriādike bhage vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāni nāma nakkhattāni, tehi samaṃ gacchanti pavattantīti bhagā, sineruyugandharauttarakuruhimavantādibhājanalokavisesasannissayā sobhā kappaṭṭhiyabhāvato. Tepi bhagavā vami tannivāsasattāvāsasamatikkamanato tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena pajahīti. Evampi bhage vamīti bhagavā.
因为他舍弃了转轮王的祥瑞、名声、权柄与安乐;
也舍弃了世间心,故为善逝、世尊。
显示巴利原文 Cakkavattisiriṃ yasmā, yasaṃ issariyaṃ sukhaṃ; Pahāsi lokacittañca, sugato bhagavā tato.
为何世尊被称为“舍弃诸部分者”?所谓“部分”,即自性法的分类,如蕴、处、界等;这其中又有色、受等,以及过去等众多类别。世尊将它们全部舍弃、吐出、不顾恋地抛弃,不再取回,他断除了一切戏论、一切轭缚、一切系著、一切结缚,证得了不死界。正如对于一切处的地、水、火、风,眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意,色、声、香、味、触、法,眼识……乃至……意识,眼触……乃至……意触,眼触所生受……乃至……意触所生受,眼触所生想……乃至……意触所生想,眼触所生思……乃至……意触所生思,色爱……乃至……法爱,色寻……乃至……法寻,色伺……乃至……法伺,以如此无余法分别,将一切法分类无遗地舍弃、吐出,以无顾恋的舍弃将它们抛弃了。即如此说:显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhāge vamīti bhagavā? Bhāgā nāma sabhāvadhammakoṭṭhāsā, te khandhāyatanadhātādivasena, tatthāpi rūpavedanādivasena, atītādivasena ca anekavidhā, te ca bhagavā ‘‘sabbaṃ papañcaṃ, sabbaṃ yogaṃ, sabbaṃ ganthaṃ, sabbaṃ saṃyojanaṃ samucchinditvā amataṃ dhātuṃ samadhigacchanto vami uggiri anapekkho chaḍḍayi na paccāvami. Tathā hesa sabbatthakameva pathaviṃ āpaṃ tejaṃ vāyaṃ, cakkhuṃ sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhaṃ kāyaṃ manaṃ, rūpe sadde gandhe rase phoṭṭhabbe dhamme, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ…pe… manoviññāṇaṃ, cakkhusamphassaṃ…pe… manosamphassaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ saññaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ saññaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ, rūpataṇhaṃ …pe… dhammataṇhaṃ, rūpavitakkaṃ…pe… dhammavitakkaṃ, rūpavicāraṃ…pe… dhammavicāra’’ntiādinā anupadadhammavibhāgavasenapi sabbeva dhammakoṭṭhāse anavasesato vami uggiri anapekkhapariccāgena chaḍḍayi. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ –
阿难,凡已弃舍、已吐出、已解脱、已断除、已遣出者,如来决不会再将其取回;此事不可能发生。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ taṃ, ānanda, cattaṃ vantaṃ muttaṃ pahīnaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, taṃ tathāgato puna paccāvamissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.183).
如此,世尊也因舍断诸分而被称为“已舍断诸分者”。或者说,“已舍断诸分者”是指:通过圣道智,将一切善与不善、有罪与无罪、劣与胜、黑与白及其对应之法,悉皆弃舍、吐出、无有眷顾地断除、抛弃,并为令他人亦能如此而宣说了法。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāge vamīti sabbepi kusalākusale sāvajjānavajje hīnapaṇīte kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāge dhamme ariyamaggañāṇamukhena vami uggiri anapekkho pariccaji pajahi, paresañca tathattāya dhammaṃ desesi. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“诸比丘,法尚应舍,何况非法。诸比丘,我当为你们说筏喻之法,为渡而非为执。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Dhammāpi vo, bhikkhave, pahātabbā, pageva adhammā (ma. ni. 1.240). Kullūpamaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāyā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.240).
世尊亦因舍弃这些诸分,而得世尊之名。显示巴利原文
Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
大仙已舍弃了蕴、处、界等诸法差别;
因已弃舍黑法与白法,故被称为世尊。
显示巴利原文 Khandhāyatanadhātādi-dhammabhedā mahesinā; Kaṇhā sukkā yato vantā, tatopi bhagavā mato.
他具足福份,受持福份,并舍弃福份与诸分;
舍弃福份与诸分故,胜利者即名世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhāgavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino’’ti.
在此,简略而言,佛陀的功德依自利成就与利他行道而有二种。其中,自利成就依断德成就与智德成就的差别而有二种,因威德成就等不离于此,故含摄其中。利他行道依加行与意乐的差别而有二种。其中,加行是指心无顾念利养恭敬等,为众生开示一切离苦之法;意乐是指即使对怨敌亦常怀利益之心,以及等待智慧成熟之时等利他行道;即便是通过接受财物等方式利益众生,也属于利他行道。因此,为阐明这些,应知在经文中采用了“阿拉汉”等词。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yasmā saṅkhepato attahitasampattiparahitapaṭipattivasena duvidhā buddhaguṇā, tāsu attahitasampatti pahānasampadāñāṇasampadābhedato duvidhā, ānubhāvasampadādīnaṃ tadavinābhāvena tadantogadhattā. Parahitapaṭipatti payogāsayabhedato duvidhā. Tattha payogato lābhasakkārādinirapekkhacittassa sabbadukkhaniyyānikadhammūpadeso, āsayato paṭiviruddhesupi niccaṃ hitesitā, ñāṇaparipākakālāgamanādiparahitapaṭipatti ca, āmisapaṭiggahaṇādināpi atthacariyā parahitapaṭipatti hotiyeva. Tasmā tesaṃ vibhāvanavasena pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘araha’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
其中,以“阿拉汉”一词,依断德成就阐明了世尊的自利成就。以“正自觉者”与“世间解”这些词,依智德成就而阐明。难道“世间解”一词不也阐明了正自觉性吗?确实阐明,然仍有差别:“正自觉者”一词阐明了遍知智的威力,而“世间解”一词则阐明了了知意乐、随眠等智的威力。以“明行具足”一词,阐明了世尊一切自利成就。以“善逝”一词,则从起源阐明了世尊的自利成就与利他行道。以“无上调御丈夫、天人师”这些词,阐明了世尊的利他行道。以“佛陀”一词,阐明了世尊的自利成就与利他行道。如此,在说了“正自觉者”之后,再说“佛陀”一词便得到了合理的解释。因此说:“自己觉悟,也令其他有情觉悟”等。以“世尊”一词,也从起源阐明了世尊一切自利成就与利他行道。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘araha’’nti iminā padena pahānasampadāvasena bhagavato attahitasampatti vibhāvitā. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho, lokavidū’’ti ca imehi padehi ñāṇasampadāvasena. Nanu ca ‘‘lokavidū’’ti imināpi sammāsambuddhatā vibhāvīyatīti? Saccaṃ vibhāvīyati, atthi pana viseso, ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti iminā sabbaññutaññāṇānubhāvo vibhāvito, ‘‘lokavidū’’ti pana iminā āsayānusayañāṇādīnampi ānubhāvo vibhāvitoti. ‘‘Vijjācaraṇasampanno’’ti iminā sabbāpi bhagavato attahitasampatti vibhāvitā. ‘‘Sugato’’ti pana iminā samudāgamato paṭṭhāya bhagavato attahitasampatti, parahitapaṭipatti ca vibhāvitā. ‘‘Anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussāna’’nti imehi padehi bhagavato parahitapaṭipatti vibhāvitā. ‘‘Buddho’’ti iminā bhagavato attahitasampatti, parahitapaṭipatti ca vibhāvitā. Evañca katvā ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti vatvā ‘‘buddho’’ti vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘attanāpi bujjhi aññepi satte bodhesī’’tiādi. ‘‘Bhagavā’’ti ca imināpi samudāgamato paṭṭhāya bhagavato sabbā attahitasampatti, parahitapaṭipatti ca vibhāvitā.
又有另一种方式——从因、果、利益众生三方面,简略而言,佛陀的功德有三种。其中,以“阿拉汉、正自觉者、明行具足者、世间解”这些词,从果德成就方面阐明了佛陀的功德。以“无上调御丈夫、天人师”这些词,从利益众生方面显示了佛陀的功德。以“佛陀”一词,从果德方面和利益众生方面阐明了佛陀的功德。而以“善逝、世尊”这些词,应知是从因、果、利益众生三方面阐明了佛陀的功德。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – hetuphalasattūpakāravasena saṅkhepato tividhā buddhaguṇā. Tattha ‘‘arahaṃ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno lokavidū’’ti imehi padehi phalasampattivasena buddhaguṇā vibhāvitā. ‘‘Anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussāna’’nti imehi sattūpakāravasena buddhaguṇā pakāsitā. ‘‘Buddho’’ti iminā phalavasena, sattūpakāravasena ca buddhaguṇā vibhāvitā. ‘‘Sugato bhagavā’’ti pana imehi padehi hetuphalasattūpakāravasena buddhaguṇā vibhāvitāti veditabbaṃ.
145 「他的」是指修习佛随念的瑜伽行者。「如是」是指以「此处有此理趣」等所述的方式。「那时」是指在忆念佛功德的时候。「被贪欲缠缚」是指心被贪欲所缠缚,即与达到缠缚程度的贪欲相应之心,如同森林被盗贼所占据一般,为那贪欲所缠缚,因为那是缠缚生起之处,故说「被贪欲缠缚」。或者,贪欲之缠缚应视为在那相应之心上生起。此中,「以贪欲」是指以贪欲为因。「成为正直」是指:由事先去除了身弯曲等,又无谄等令心不正直的因素,或者由于没有贪欲等缠缚,无下劣与高举,而成就心的正直状态。又或者,「成为正直」是指因业处进入行道,遣除昏沉与掉举,依中道寂止之相而行,心得正直。「以如来为所缘」是指以如来的功德作为所缘。显示巴利原文
145.Tassāti buddhānussatikammaṭṭhānikassa yogino. Evanti ‘‘tatrāyaṃ nayo’’tiādinā vuttappakārena. Tasmiṃ samayeti buddhaguṇānussaraṇasamaye. Rāgapariyuṭṭhitanti rāgena pariyuṭṭhitaṃ, pariyuṭṭhānappattehi rāgehi sahitaṃ cittaṃ araññamiva corehi tena pariyuṭṭhitanti vuttaṃ, tassa pariyuṭṭhānaṭṭhānabhāvato, pariyuṭṭhitarāganti attho. Yaṃ vā rāgassa pariyuṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ taṃsahite citte upacaritanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Etasmiṃ pakkhe rāgenāti rāgena hetunāti attho. Ujugatamevāti pageva kāyavaṅkādīnaṃ apanītattā, cittassa ca anujubhāvakarānaṃ māyādīnaṃ abhāvato, rāgādipariyuṭṭhānābhāvena vā onatiunnativirahato ujubhāvameva kataṃ. Atha vā ujugatamevāti kammaṭṭhānassa vīthiṃ otiṇṇatāya līnuddhaccavigamanato majjhimasamathanimittapaṭipattiyā ujubhāvameva gataṃ. Tathāgataṃ ārabbhāti tathāgataguṇe ārammaṇaṃ katvā.
「如是他的」即这样他的。与「彼世尊是阿罗汉」等如前所述的方式,他随念佛陀功德,这是关联。「如是」是指以「那时不」等所述的方式。「心倾向于佛功德」是指心趣向于佛功德。「寻与伺转起」以此显示,名为佛功德的业处,被寻所触、被寻所遍触,并且反复地作意。喜生起:由于修习之力,能产生近行定的强力喜生起。喜心者:具有如前所述喜的心。身心的不安:是身轻安与心轻安的对立面,是微细的、与掉举相应的烦恼。平息:即止息。次第地在一刹那:当以佛功德为所缘的修习,带来层层殊胜而转起时,那时诸盖已被镇伏,烦恼已止息,信等诸根极为清净,由于修习的熟练,寻与伺变得极其敏锐,强力的喜生起,以喜为近因的轻安殊胜地生起,轻安者的身,以定为近因的乐变得更为坚固而转起,被乐所滋润的心,在业处上正确地入定。如此次第地,在预备阶段,寻等层层变得更为敏锐,由于修习的中道寂止行,以及诸根的一味性,变得最为敏锐,在一刹那,诸禅支生起。关于此,世尊曾说:显示巴利原文
Iccassāti iti assa. ‘‘So bhagavā itipi araha’’ntiādinā pubbe vuttappakārena buddhaguṇe anuvitakkayatoti sambandho. Evanti ‘‘neva tasmiṃ samaye’’tiādinā vuttanayena. Buddhaguṇapoṇāti buddhaguṇaninnā. ‘‘Vitakkavicārā pavattantī’’ti etena buddhaguṇasaṅkhātaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ vitakkāhataṃ, vitakkapariyāhataṃ, punappunaṃ anumajjanañca karotīti dasseti. Pīti uppajjatīti bhāvanāvasena upacārajjhānanipphādikā balavatī pīti uppajjati. Pītimanassa vuttappakārapītisahitacittassa. Kāyacittadarathāti kāyacittapassaddhīnaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtā sukhumāvatthā uddhaccasahagatā kilesā. Paṭippassambhantīti sannisīdanti. Anukkamena ekakkhaṇeti yadā buddhaguṇārammaṇā bhāvanā uparūpari visesaṃ āvahantī pavattati, tadā nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva honti, kilesā sannisinnāva honti, suvisadāni saddhādīni indriyāni honti, bhāvanāya paguṇatāya vitakkavicārā sātisayaṃ paṭukiccāva honti, balavatī pīti uppajjati, pītipadaṭṭhānā passaddhi savisesā jāyati, passaddhakāyassa samādhipadaṭṭhānaṃ sukhaṃ thirataraṃ hutvā pavattati, sukhena anubrūhitaṃ cittaṃ kammaṭṭhāne sammadeva samādhiyati. Evaṃ anukkamena pubbabhāge vitakkādayo uparūpari paṭupaṭutarabhāvena pavattitvā bhāvanāya majjhimasamathapaṭipattiyā indriyānañca ekarasabhāvena paṭutamāni hutvā ekakkhaṇe jhānaṅgāni uppajjanti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ bhagavatā –
「摩诃男,当圣弟子忆念如来时,那时他的心不被贪欲缠缚……快乐的心入定。」(《增支部》6.10)显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ , mahānāma, samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti…pe… sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti (a. ni. 6.10).
然而,为何此处禅那未达到安止?答道:「由于佛功德的甚深性」等。因为在甚深的所缘上,止的修习如同沉入深水的船,无处立足。而「甚深性」一词,也包含了自性法,因为自性法是甚深的,而非概念。难道不是依于概念才能把握自性法吗?确实,在预备阶段是把握的;但当修习增长时,便超越了概念,心唯安住于自性法。难道在自性法上,某些地方(如第二无色禅等)安止也能成就吗?确实能成就,但那是对单一类所缘而言。而此处所缘是多种类的,为显此义,故说「由于倾向于忆念种种功德」。即便如此,难道不像对发等种种部分作意修习者,其修习以安止方式仅停留于一个部分那样,此处为何不能如此呢?这是不恰当的类比。因为在那种修习中,虽然部分众多,但只执取厌恶相,故修习以单一方式转起;而在此处,佛功德是种种的,不能只安住于一种功德,当依修习之力佛功德现前时,信便增强,因此才说「由于倾向」。如果仅仅达到近行定,为何称之为佛随念呢?答道:「此即」等。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha jhānaṃ appanāpattaṃ na hotīti āha ‘‘buddhaguṇānaṃ pana gambhīratāyā’’tiādi. Gambhīre hi ārammaṇe gambhīre udake patitanāvā viya samathabhāvanā patiṭṭhaṃ na labhati, ‘‘gambhīratāyā’’ti ca iminā sabhāvadhammatāpi saṅgahitā. Sabhāvadhammo hi gambhīro na paññatti. Nanu ca tajjāpaññattivasena sabhāvadhammo gayhatīti? Saccaṃ gayhati pubbabhāge, bhāvanāya pana vaḍḍhamānāya paññattiṃ samatikkamitvā sabhāveyeva cittaṃ tiṭṭhati. Nanu ca sabhāvadhammepi katthaci appanā samijjhati dutiyāruppajjhānādīti? Saccaṃ samijjhati, tañca kho ekappakāre ārammaṇe, idaṃ pana nānappakāranti dassento ‘‘nānappakāraguṇānussaraṇādhimuttatāyā’’ti āha. Evampi yathā nānappakāresu kesādikoṭṭhāsesu manasikāraṃ pavattentassa ekasmiṃyeva koṭṭhāse appanāvasena bhāvanā avatiṭṭhati, evamidha kasmā na hotīti? Visamoyaṃ upaññāso. Tattha hi satipi koṭṭhāsabahubhāve ekappakāreneva bhāvanā vattati paṭikkūlākārasseva gahaṇato, idha pana nānappakārena guṇānaṃ nānappakārattā, na ayamekasmiṃyeva guṇe ṭhātuṃ sakkoti bhāvanābalena paccakkhato buddhaguṇesu upaṭṭhahantesu saddhāya balavabhāvato. Teneva hi ‘‘adhimuttatāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadi upacārappattaṃ jhānaṃ hoti, kathaṃ buddhānussatīti vuttanti āha ‘‘tadeta’’ntiādi.
他具足恭敬与尊重,因现前承事导师的功德身。由此,信心广大,如同不坏净般的广大信心。由于依随念佛功德而修习,故念力广大。由彼功德极为甚深、种类繁多,故慧力广大。由彼功德是胜妙福田,故福德广大。他多喜悦与欢喜,因佛随念是喜觉支的立足处。他能忍受恐惧与怖畏,因为以佛功德为所缘的念能克服恐惧与怖畏。所以世尊说:「你们当随念正觉者,便不会有恐惧。」(《相应部》1.249,稍有异)他能堪忍痛苦,因佛随念能使身体的痛苦如莲叶滑落水珠般退去。「共住想」即与佛共同居住之想。心倾向于佛地,因为现前显现了佛功德的伟大。由于修习佛随念时,佛功德恒时在心中转动,故说「如同亲见导师」。「更向上而不能通达」:依此修习为基,向上却不能通达诸谛。「以善趣为归宿」:即以善趣为来世。显示巴利原文
Sagāravo hoti sappatisso, satthu guṇasarīrassa paccakkhato upaṭṭhahanato. Tatoyeva saddhāvepullaṃ aveccappasādasadisaṃ saddhāmahattaṃ. Buddhaguṇānaṃ anussaraṇavasena bhāvanāya pavattattā sativepullaṃ. Tesaṃ paramagambhīratāya, nānappakāratāya ca paññāvepullaṃ. Tesaṃ uḷārapuññakkhettatāya puññavepullañca adhigacchati. Pītipāmojjabahulo hoti pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyattā buddhānussatiyā. Bhayabheravasaho buddhaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā bhayabheravābhibhavanato. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘anussaretha sambuddhaṃ, bhayaṃ tumhāka no siyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.249 thokaṃ visadisaṃ). Dukkhādhivāsanasamattho buddhānussatiyā sarīradukkhassa padumapalāse udakassa viya vinivaṭṭanato . Saṃvāsasaññanti sahavāsasaññaṃ. Buddhabhūmiyaṃ cittaṃ namati buddhaguṇānaṃ mahantabhāvassa paccakkhato upaṭṭhānato. Buddhānussatibhāvanāya sabbadā buddhaguṇānaṃ citte viparivattanato vuttaṃ ‘‘sammukhā satthāraṃ passato viyā’’ti. Uttari appaṭivijjhantoti imāya bhāvanāya upari taṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā saccāni appaṭivijjhanto. Sugatiparāyaṇoti sugatisamparāyo.
「不放逸」:即不疏忽、恭敬地投入。「应当做」:即应作。「有妙慧者」:即具足善妙智慧者。「如此具大威力」:即如所说,以能镇伏盖障等为力用,以对导师具足恭敬等为因,而具足的大威力。显示巴利原文
Appamādanti appamajjanaṃ sakkaccaṃ anuyogaṃ. Kayirāthāti kareyya. Sumedhasoti sundarapañño . Evaṃ mahānubhāvāyāti vuttappakārena nīvaraṇavikkhambhanādisamatthena satthari sagāravabhāvādihetubhūtena mahatā sāmatthiyena samannāgatāya.
二、法随念论释显示巴利原文
2. Dhammānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
146 在法随念中,此处的词义与自性义最初已述,故略而不论,仅显示修习方法,故开示“欲修法随念者”等。然则,为何在此不像佛随念中那样说“具足不坏净”?难道六随念并非依圣弟子而次第宣说?确实如此,但即便如此,为显示“戒等功德清净的凡夫亦能成就”,此处不说“具足不坏净”,而圣弟子则易得成就。又因已在巴利经典中出现,且在佛随念的解释中已述,应如此看待,此论亦将稍后出现。显示巴利原文
146.Dhammānussatinti ettha padattho, sabhāvattho ca ādito vuttoyevāti taṃ anāmasitvā bhāvanāvidhānameva dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammānussatiṃ bhāvetukāmenāpī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Kasmā panettha buddhānussatiyaṃ viya ‘‘aveccappasādasamannāgatenā’’ti na vuttaṃ. Nanu etā paṭipāṭiyā cha anussatiyo ariyasāvakānaṃ vasena desanaṃ āruḷhāti? Saccametaṃ, evaṃ santepi ‘‘parisuddhasīlādiguṇānaṃ puthujjanānampi ijjhantī’’ti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘aveccappasādasamannāgatenā’’ti idha na vuttaṃ, ariyasāvakānaṃ pana sukhena ijjhantīti. Tathāpi pāḷiyaṃ āgatattā ca buddhānussatiniddese vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, ayañca vicāro parato āgamissateva.
147 “教法”:以“也”字亦将出世间法包含在内。“于其余”:即于“现见的”等词中。“唯是出世间法”:此限定乃从非譬喻义的“现见”等而说;然从譬喻义而言,这些功德于教法中亦能存在。例如,教法对于多闻、通达圣典、具足最上念与慧的智者,由初善等殊胜而可自见,故为“现见的”。若谓“不亲近依止阿阇梨则不可得”?出世间法同样唯依善友而成就,导师之教导亦复如是。“以现见而胜”:此义于摧破外道时,唯依非譬喻义可得;于战胜烦恼时,则依譬喻义,由为辗转之因故。“值得现见”:此义亦可得,因其生起为彻底断除一切杂染法、增长清净法故。此义应依“乔达弥!你当知,若你了知某些法后,这些法令贪增盛而非离贪,令结缚而非离缚,令执取而非无执取。乔达弥!你应一决断持守:此非法,此非律,此非导师之教。”(《小品》406;《增支部》8.53),以及“比丘们!法尚且应舍,何况非法。”(《中部》1.240)等经文来阐明。由于是证悟无时的方便,故为“无时的”。由存在性与清净性,值得说“来见”,故为“来见的”。显示巴利原文
147.Pariyattidhammopīti pi-saddena lokuttaradhammaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Itaresūti sandiṭṭhikādipadesu. Lokuttaradhammovāti avadhāraṇaṃ nippariyāyena sandiṭṭhikādiatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, pariyāyato panete pariyattidhammepi sambhavanteva. Tathā hi pariyattidhammo bahussutena āgatāgamena paramena satinepakkena samannāgatena paññavatā ādikalyāṇatādivisesato sayaṃ daṭṭhabboti sandiṭṭhiko. Ācariyapayirupāsanāya vinā na labbhāti ce? Lokuttaradhammepi samāne kalyāṇamittasannissayeneva sijjhanato, tathā satthusandassanepi. ‘‘Sandiṭṭhiyā jayatī’’ti ayaṃ panattho titthiyanimmaddane nippariyāyatova labbhati , kilesajaye pariyāyato paramparāhetubhāvato. ‘‘Sandiṭṭhaṃ arahatī’’ti ayampi attho labbhateva, sabbaso saṃkilesadhammānaṃ pahānaṃ, vodānadhammānaṃ paribrūhanañca uddissa pavattattā. Ayañca attho ‘‘ye kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi, ime dhammā sarāgāya saṃvattanti no virāgāya, saññogāya saṃvattanti no visaññogāya, saupādānāya saṃvattanti no anupādānāya. Ekaṃsena, gotami, dhāreyyāsi ‘neso dhammo, neso vinayo, netaṃ satthusāsana’’’nti (cūḷava. 406; a. ni. 8.53), ‘‘dhammāpi vo, bhikkhave, pahātabbā, pageva adhammā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.240) ca evamādīhi suttapadehi vibhāvetabbo. Akālikādhigamupāyatāya akāliko. Vijjamānatāparisuddhatāhi ehipassavidhiṃ arahatīti ehipassiko. Tato eva vaṭṭadukkhanittharaṇatthikehi attano citte upanayanaṃ, cittassa vā tattha upanayanaṃ arahatīti opaneyyiko. Vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā paricayena sammadeva atthavedaṃ, dhammavedañca labhantehi paccattaṃ veditabbo viññūhīti. Evaṃ sandiṭṭhikādipadesu pariyattidhammampi pakkhipitvā manasikāro yujjateva.
“那”:即偈颂。“由于遍善”:即由一切部分而善美。“法”:即教法。虽从胜义而言,并无离于支分之所谓“集合体”,然依支分而以集合相观察时,即名为“偈颂”。为显示其似与彼分离,而施设共主语之表达,故说“以初句为初善”等。“一贯的”:此谓非由繁多分别,随其连贯而为一贯;而其他者,则依所说法之分别,有初中后之分。“以序分”:即以显示时、处、说法者、众会等为相之序分经。“以结语”:即以“此为所说”等(《相应部》1.249),或以“如是,凡彼所说,乃缘此而说”(《增支部》10.27)等,对所说法义作结。显示巴利原文
Sāti gāthā. Samantabhadrakattāti sabbabhāgehi sundarattā. Dhammassāti sāsanadhammassa. Kiñcāpi avayavavinimutto samudāyo nāma paramatthato koci natthi, yesu pana avayavesu samudāyarūpena avekkhitesu ‘‘gāthā’’ti samaññā, taṃ tato bhinnaṃ viya katvā saṃsāmivohāraṃ āropetvā dassento ‘‘paṭhamena pādena ādikalyāṇā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Ekānusandhika’’nti idaṃ nātibahuvibhāgaṃ yathānusandhinā ekānusandhikaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, itarassa pana teneva desetabbadhammavibhāgena ādimajjhapariyosānabhāgā labbhantīti. Nidānenāti kāladesadesakaparisādiapadisanalakkhaṇena nidānaganthena. Nigamanenāti ‘‘idamavocā’’tiādikena (saṃ. ni. 1.249), ‘‘iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti (a. ni. 10.27) vā yathāvuttatthanigamanena.
此释特为经藏而作注释,故先依经藏显示法之初、中、后善;现在再依经藏与律藏加以显示,故说“具有因缘与起因”等。其中,“具有因缘与起因”意指具有如前所述的因缘与起因。“适合所化者”是说:学处的制定与法的宣说,乃随顺彼彼学处之相状而制立,能契合所化者的意乐;而依此而转起者,亦适合所化之机。“义”指所开示的戒等义理。通过“那是什么因呢?(相应部1.249)”“诸比丘,譬如(相应部3.95)”等方式,于各处引用因由与譬喻,故与因由及例证相连接。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ kathā visesato suttapiṭakasaṃvaṇṇanāti katvā suttapiṭakavasena dhammassa ādikalyāṇādikaṃ dassetvā idāni suttapiṭakavinayapiṭakānaṃ vasena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sanidānasauppattikattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sanidānasauppattikattāti yathāvuttanidānena sanidānatāya, saaṭṭhuppattikatāya ca. Veneyyānaṃ anurūpatoti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā, dhammadesanāya ca taṃtaṃsikkhāpadabhāvena paññāpiyamānassa veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ pavattiyamānassa anurūpato. Atthassāti desiyamānassa ca sīlādiatthassa. ‘‘Taṃ kissa hetu (saṃ. ni. 1.249)? Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.95) tattha tattha hetūpamāgahaṇena hetudāharaṇayuttato.
如此,依经与律显示教法(pariyattidhamma)的初、中、后善之后,现在为总摄三藏而显此,故说“整个也”等。其中,所谓的教法(sāsanadhammo)是指——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ suttavinayavasena pariyattidhammassa ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇataṃ dassetvā idāni tīṇi piṭakāni ekajjhaṃ gahetvā taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sakalopī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sāsanadhammoti –
诸恶莫作,众善奉行;
“自心清净,这是诸佛的教法。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ, kusalassa upasampadā; Sacittapariyodapanaṃ, etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti. (dha. pa. 183; dī. ni. 2.90) –
如此阐明的导师教法,即是教法本身。以戒为初善,因戒是教法的根本。以止等为中善,因这些是教法成就的中间部分。以涅槃为终善,因证得涅槃后更无应作之事。于教法中,正行道依慧而有,而慧以戒与定为根本,故说“以戒与定为初善”。慧又依随觉与通达而有二种,故总摄此二而说“以观与道为中善”。其成果是果,其作用是现证涅槃,此后更无应作之事,故显示此而说“以果与涅槃为终善”。又或以“果”指有余涅槃,以“涅槃”指无余依涅槃,此两者是教法成就的究竟,故说“以果与涅槃为终善”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttassa satthusāsanassa pakāsako pariyattidhammo. Sīlena ādikalyāṇo sīlamūlakattā sāsanassa. Samathādīhi majjhekalyāṇo tesaṃ sāsanasampattiyā vemajjhabhāvato. Nibbānena pariyosānakalyāṇo tadadhigamato uttarikaraṇīyābhāvato. Sāsane sammāpaṭipatti nāma paññāya hoti, tassā ca sīlaṃ, samādhi ca mūlanti āha ‘‘sīlasamādhīhi ādikalyāṇo’’ti. Paññā pana anubodhapaṭivedhavasena duvidhāti tadubhayampi gaṇhanto ‘‘vipassanāmaggehi majjhekalyāṇo’’ti āha. Tassa nipphatti phalaṃ, kiccaṃ nibbānasacchikiriyā, tato paraṃ kattabbaṃ natthīti dassento āha ‘‘phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo’’ti. Phalaggahaṇena vā saupādisesanibbānamāha, itarena itaraṃ, tadubhayañca sāsanasampattiyā osānanti āha ‘‘phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo’’ti.
佛陀的善觉悟,即正等觉,以此为初善,因教法由此而生。一切杂染的彻底断除——清净,以及法的正法性圆满,以此为初中善,因这是教法的体性。导师所教导的如实行道——僧伽的善行道,以此为终善,因由此教法善住于世。“那”指教法。“为了真实性”是指为了达到如世尊所说法的真实性、那样的状态。而那种真实性有三种:正等觉、独觉、声闻觉,除此之外,别无涅槃的证得。其中,于一切功德中最为第一,且是其余两种觉的根本,故第一觉为初善;功德处于中间,故第二觉为中善;不杂于此两者,且无此两者之过失,故教法的第三觉为终善。显示巴利原文
Buddhassa subodhitā sammāsambuddhatā, tāya ādikalyāṇo tappabhavattā. Sabbaso saṃkilesappahānaṃ vodānaṃ, pāripūrī ca dhammasudhammatā, tāya majjhekalyāṇo taṃsarīrattā. Satthārā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ tathā paṭipatti saṅghasuppaṭipatti, tāya pariyosānakalyāṇo, tāya sāsanassa loke suppatiṭṭhitabhāvato. Tanti sāsanadhammaṃ. Tathattāyāti yathattāya bhagavatā dhammo desito, tathattāya tathabhāvāya. So pana abhisambodhi paccekabodhi sāvakabodhīti tividho , ito aññathā nibbānādhigamassa abhāvato. Tattha sabbaguṇehi aggabhāvato, itarabodhidvayamūlatāya ca paṭhamāya bodhiyā ādikalyāṇatā, guṇehi vemajjhabhāvato dutiyāya majjhekalyāṇatā, tadubhayāvaratāya, tadosānatāya ca sāsanadhammassa tatiyāya pariyosānakalyāṇatā vuttā.
教法即此:能镇伏盖障——因为在解脱处的开端,听闻正法者便能镇伏诸盖。此即所说:显示巴利原文
Esoti sāsanadhammo. Nīvaraṇavikkhambhanatoti vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā saddhammaṃ suṇantassa nīvaraṇānaṃ vikkhambhanasambhavato. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ –
“贤友,无论何时,比丘听受导师或某位可敬同梵行者的说法,他就在那时那处获得义之觉知、法之觉知。”(增支部5.26)显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā yathāvuso, bhikkhuno satthā vā dhammaṃ deseti, aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī , tathā tathā so tattha labhati atthavedaṃ labhati dhammaveda’’nti (a. ni. 5.26).
“诸比丘,每当圣弟子倾耳谛听法时,他那时便已断除五盖。”(相应部5.219)——显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ, bhikkhave, samaye ariyasāvako ohitasoto dhammaṃ suṇāti, pañcassa nīvaraṇāni tasmiṃ samaye pahīnāni hontī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.219) –
等。“能带来止观之乐”者,即成就止之乐与观之乐。此亦曾说——显示巴利原文
Ca ādi. Samathavipassanāsukhāvahanatoti samathasukhassa ca vipassanāsukhassa ca sampādanato. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
他远离诸欲,远离不善法,有寻有伺,成就离生喜乐……”(长部1.279;中部2.138)显示巴利原文
‘‘So vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukha’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 1.279; ma. ni. 2.138).
无论从何处正观诸蕴的生灭,
便获得喜与悦,此乃了知不死者之境;
此是非人之乐,属于正观法者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānataṃ; Amānusī ratī hoti, sammā dhammaṃ vipassato’’ti ca. (dha. pa. 374, 373);
“如是行道者”:如同能带来止观之乐而修行,或如同导师所教导那样修行的教法。由于能带来“如彼之状态”——即依六支舍,于可意等境,能带来如彼而不为世间法所染着的状态。当这位世尊依前述方式开示三种善法时,所阐明的教法梵行与道梵行,随其所应,由义成就而“有义”,由辞成就而“有词”,如此相连接。显示巴利原文
Tathāpaṭipannoti yathā samathavipassanāsukhaṃ āvahati, yathā vā satthārā anusiṭṭhaṃ, tathā paṭipanno sāsanadhammo. Tādibhāvāvahanatoti chaḷaṅgupekkhāvasena iṭṭhādīsu tādibhāvassa lokadhammehi anupalepassa āvahanato. Esa bhagavā vuttanayena tividhakalyāṇaṃ dhammaṃ desento yaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ, maggabrahmacariyañca pakāseti, taṃ yathānurūpaṃ atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjananti yojanā.
其中,不加简别,三种学与完整经教之法,是教法梵行。对此曾这样说:“尊者,哪些佛陀、世尊的梵行不能久住?”等(律藏·波罗夷 18)。摄一切学处之精华——三学处的圣道,是道梵行。对此曾这样说:“生已尽,梵行已立,所作已办”(大品 23;相应部 5.186)。“随其所应”即如其所应。教法梵行以义利成就而具义,故摄三学;道梵行于此则无可言说。“以义利成就”即因成就义利。此处的“具”字即成就之义。另一种(道梵行)则依所述之义而具义,且具文。然而,有人于此分别说:“词之自性即是具义,义之自性即是具文”,此说不善,因为如此分别的教法并不存在。因为音声与意义如同不相离的特征而被结合运用。事实上,他们承认这二者有世俗混杂的状态。即使有差异,在“具文”一词中,若如“与子俱来”等用法,意指均等结合,则“诸比丘,应依义,莫依文”这一重义之说将受损害;若如“有毛、有翼”等用法,仅指存在,则不能把握文之成就。因此,应依注释书中所说之理而把握其义。显示巴利原文
Tattha avisesena tisso sikkhā, sakalo ca tantidhammo sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘katamesānaṃ kho, bhante, buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ brahmacariyaṃ naciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosī’’tiādi (pārā. 18). Sabbasikkhānaṃ maṇḍabhūtasikkhattayasaṅgahito ariyamaggo maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti (mahāva. 23; saṃ. ni. 5.186). Yathānurūpanti yathārahaṃ. Sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ hi sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ. Maggabrahmacariye vattabbameva natthi. Atthasampattiyāti sampannatthatāya. Sampattiattho hi idha saha-saddo. Itaraṃ pana yathāvuttenatthena sātthaṃ, sabyañjanañca. Ye panettha ‘‘vacanasabhāvaṃ sātthaṃ, atthasabhāvaṃ sabyañjana’’nti vibhajitvā vadanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ, tathā vibhattassa pariyattidhammassa abhāvato. Saddatthā hi abhinnarūpā viya hutvā viniyogaṃ gacchanti. Tathā hi nesaṃ lokiyāmissībhāvaṃ paṭijānanti. Satipi vā bhede ‘‘sabyañjana’’nti ettha yadi tulyayogo adhippeto ‘‘saputto āgato’’tiādīsu viya, evaṃ sati ‘‘atthapaṭisaraṇā, bhikkhave, hotha, mā byañjanapaṭisaraṇā’’ti atthappadhānavādo bādhito siyā, atha vijjamānatāmattaṃ ‘‘salomako sapakkhako’’tiādīsu viya byañjanasampatti aggahitā siyā. Tasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayeneva attho gahetabbo.
在“具义、具文”此句中,为依导论之理显示其义,故说:“概述……乃至……具文”。其中,虽然导论由文之门把握文义,故先列举“字、词”等文句(导论 4 十二句),但这里在圣典中,因出现“具义、具文”,故为首先显示义句而说“概述、阐发”等。其中,以略说而示、明照,是“概述”,如“执取之比丘,为魔所缚;不执取者,得解脱”等(相应部 3.64)。仅以此,彼比丘即通达,故说“世尊已了知”等。最初之开示、明照,是“阐发”。此“示”字用于最初业,如“令知、令安立”等(相应部 2.20)。此二句为利根者而说,因是略说;利根者依略说及初说之义而修行。将略说广说,将已说一次者再说,是“开显、分别”。如对略说及仅说一次之“善法”义,以“何者为善法?于何时有欲界善心”等(法集论 1)广说,以开显及分别再说。此二句为中根者而说,因是解说。对已开显者再作广说,对已分别者以种种方式令知,令所化众生心喜悦,是“显了、令知”。如对已开显分别之“有触”等义,以“于其时,何者是触?于其时,所有之触、接触、等触”等(法集论 2)显了及令知。显示巴利原文
Sātthaṃ sabyañjananti ettha nettinayenāpi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkāsana…pe… sabyañjana’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha yadipi nettiyaṃ byañjanamukhena byañjanatthaggahaṇaṃ hotīti ‘‘akkharaṃ pada’’ntiādinā (netti. 4 dvādasapada) byañjanapadāni paṭhamaṃ uddiṭṭhāni, idha pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjana’’nti āgatattā atthapadāniyeva paṭhamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkāsanapakāsanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhepato kāsanaṃ dīpanaṃ saṅkāsanaṃ ‘‘maññamāno bhikkhu baddho mārassa, amaññamāno mutto’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.64) viya. Tattakena hi tena bhikkhunā paṭividdhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aññātaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi. Paṭhamaṃ kāsanaṃ pakāsanaṃ. Ādikammasmiṃ hi ayaṃ pasaddo ‘‘paññapeti paṭṭhapetī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.20) viya. Tikkhindriyāpekkhaṃ cetaṃ padadvayaṃ uddesabhāvato. Tikkhindriyo hi saṅkhepato paṭhamañca vuttamatthaṃ paṭipajjati . Saṃkhittassa vitthāravacanaṃ, sakiṃ vuttassa puna vacanañca vivaraṇavibhajanāni. Yathā ‘‘kusalā dhammā’’ti saṅkhepato sakiṃyeva ca vuttassa atthassa ‘‘katame dhammā kusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ citta’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 1) vitthārato vivaraṇavasena, vibhajanavasena ca puna vacanaṃ. Majjhimindriyāpekkhametaṃ padadvayaṃ niddesabhāvato. Vivaṭassa vitthāratarābhidhānaṃ, vibhattassa ca pakārehi ñāpanaṃ veneyyānaṃ cittaparitosanaṃ uttānīkaraṇapaññāpanāni. Yathā ‘‘phasso hotī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 2) vivaṭavibhattassa atthassa ‘‘katamo tasmiṃ samaye phasso? Yo tasmiṃ samaye phasso phusanā samphusanā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 2) uttānīkiriyā, paññāpanā ca. Mudindriyāpekkhametaṃ padadvayaṃ paṭiniddesabhāvato. ‘‘Paññāpanapaṭṭhapanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapakāsanaatthapadasamāyogato’’tipi pāṭho.
问:此解说方式是如何产生的?答:依《指导论》巴利圣典中所传,此为旧有经文。即:显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ panāyaṃ pāṭhavikappo jātoti? Vuccate – nettipāḷiyaṃ āgatanayena purimapāṭho. Tattha hi –
‘略说、开示,
开显、分别、显了、令知;
以此六句,
义与业已作说明。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saṅkāsanā pakāsanā, Vivaraṇā vibhajanuttānīkammapaññatti; Etehi chahi padehi, Attho kammañca niddiṭṭha’’nti. (netti. 4 dvādasapada) –
在教示与摄持的结合中,此义以“概述、阐发”等而说。后文则依经中所说“令知、令安立、开显、分别、显了、言‘见’”(相应部 2.20)之理,仅为文辞之别。如此,此两种文本虽有差别,义理并无不同。因为略说时,“初令知为令知,初安立为令安立”等句,与概述、阐发之句,其义无异。前文中的第六句“以方便令知”称为令知,后文则以阐发句作“无差别地以方便示”。因令知与示,在义的照耀自性上无有差别,且能令一切所化众生心生喜悦;于如实照耀事物自性时,便生起慧的安住。如是,由于此即义句之相,教典之义由前述六种义句的结合,便成为具义之教。显示巴利原文
Desanāhārayojanāya ca etassevatthassa ‘‘saṅkāsanā pakāsanā’’tiādinā āgataṃ. Pacchimo pana ‘‘paññapeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati vibhajati uttānīkaroti ‘passathā’ti cāhā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.20) sutte āgatanayena byañjanamattakato. Evañca nesaṃ dvinnaṃ pāṭhānaṃ viseso, na atthato. Tathā hi saṅkhepato ‘‘paṭhamaṃ ñāpanaṃ paññāpanaṃ, paṭhamameva ṭhapanaṃ paṭṭhapana’’nti imāni padāni saṅkāsanapakāsanapadehi atthato avisiṭṭhāni. Yañca purimapāṭhe chaṭṭhaṃ padaṃ ‘‘pakārato ñāpana’’nti paññāpanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ dutiyapāṭhe pakāsanapadena ‘‘nibbisesaṃ pakārato kāsana’’nti katvā. Yasmā ñāpanakāsanāni atthāvabhāsanasabhāvatāya abhinnāni, sabbesañca veneyyānaṃ cittassa tosanaṃ, buddhiyā ca nisānaṃ yāthāvato vatthusabhāvāvabhāsane jāyatīti. Evaṃ atthapadarūpattā pariyattiatthassa yathāvuttachaatthapadasamāyogato sātthaṃ sāsanaṃ.
“由字、词、文、行相、词释、解说之成就”:此处,在发音过程中,词尚未完成时的音即为字。有人说:“单字为词,字即字母”,如“ā evaṃ kira ta”等中的ā音等。另有人说:“因清净之作者以意、教说之语而发字,故为字”。有变化词尾、能令知义者为词。略说之词所表之义能显了,故为文,即语句。如说:“动词与不变词、作格、差别相合为语句”。以方式分析语句为行相。行相所表者为词释。词释之广说,依无余开示为解说。由这些字等文句的成就、具足,故为具文。显示巴利原文
Akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesasampattiyāti ettha uccāraṇavelāyaṃ apariyosite pade vaṇṇo akkharaṃ. ‘‘Ekakkharaṃ padaṃ akkhara’’nti eke ‘‘ā evaṃ kira ta’’ntiādīsu ā-kārādayo viya. ‘‘Visuddhakaraṇānaṃ manasā desanāvācāya akkharaṇato akkhara’’nti aññe. Vibhattiyantaṃ atthañāpanato padaṃ. Saṅkhepato vuttaṃ padābhihitaṃ atthaṃ byañjetīti byañjanaṃ, vākyaṃ. ‘‘Kiriyāpadaṃ abyayakārakavisesanayuttaṃ vākya’’nti hi vadanti. Pakārato vākyavibhāgo ākāro. Ākārābhihitaṃ nibbacanaṃ nirutti. Nibbacanavitthāro nissesupadesato niddeso. Etesaṃ akkharādīnaṃ byañjanapadānaṃ sampattiyā sampannatāya sabyañjanaṃ.
此处,其义理词句的结合与文辞的成就如下:以字标示,以词阐明,以文句开解,以行相分析,以词释显了,以解说施设;同样,以字开启后,以词引导了悟者,以文句广释后,以行相引导广释者,以词释引导后,以解说引导可引导者。如此,此法在被开启时引导了悟者,在被广释时引导广释者,在被引导时引导可引导者。其中,开启为初,广释为中,引导为末。如此,于三时中以三种方式宣说,能摧破三种过失,带来三种功德,调伏三种所化。因此,此法亦具三种善美,由义理与文辞的圆满,应知为“具义、具文”,以及“圆满、清净”。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyamassa atthapadasamāyogo, byañjanasampatti ca – akkharehi saṅkāseti, padehi pakāseti, byañjanehi vivarati, ākārehi vibhajati, niruttīhi uttānīkaroti, niddesehi paññapeti, tathā akkharehi ugghāṭetvā padehi vineti ugghaṭitaññuṃ, byañjanehi vipañcetvā ākārehi vineti vipañcitaññuṃ, niruttīhi netvā niddesehi vineti neyyaṃ. Evañcāyaṃ dhammo ugghaṭiyamāno ugghaṭitaññuṃ vineti, vipañciyamāno vipañcitaññuṃ, niyyamāno neyyaṃ. Tattha ugghaṭanā ādi, vipañcanā majjhe, nayanamante. Evaṃ tīsu kālesu tidhā desito dosattayavidhamano guṇattayāvaho tividhaveneyyavinayanoti. Evampi tividhakalyāṇoyaṃ dhammo atthabyañjanapāripūriyā ‘‘sāttho sabyañjano’’ti veditabbo ‘‘paripuṇṇo, parisuddho’’ti ca.
在“义之深奥”等中,“义”指经教之义。“法”指经教。“通达”指对经教及经教之义如实了知。“说法”指心中确定之经教的宣说。然而,这些义等,好比大海对于兔子等,钝根之人难以涉入其中、无法获得立足处,故为深奥。或者,“义”指因果。“法”指因。“说法”指施设,即依法而说法的言说,或以顺逆、略广等方式的讲述。“通达”指现观,即随顺义于法、随顺法于义、随顺施设路径于施设的觉了,或指应通达的诸法之自相,即无颠倒的体性。这些义等,也由于如同大海之于兔子等,对于未积集善根资粮的劣慧者难以涉入、无法获得立足处,故为深奥。其中,由于通达也依止于义,故说“以义深奥与通达深奥而具义”,以显明义之功德。由于那些法说依止于文辞,故说“以法深奥与说法深奥而具文”,以显明其文辞成就。显示巴利原文
Atthagambhīratātiādīsu attho nāma tantiattho. Dhammo tanti. Paṭivedho tantiyā, tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho. Desanā manasā vavatthāpitāya tantiyā desanā. Te panete atthādayo yasmā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāhā, alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Atha vā attho nāma hetuphalaṃ. Dhammo hetu. Desanā paññatti, yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpo, anulomapaṭilomasaṅkhepavitthārādivasena vā kathanaṃ. Paṭivedho abhisamayo, atthānurūpaṃ dhammesu, dhammānurūpaṃ atthesu, paññattipathānurūpaṃ paññattīsu avabodho, tesaṃ tesaṃ vā dhammānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo salakkhaṇasaṅkhāto aviparītasabhāvo. Tepi cete atthādayo yasmā anupacitakusalasambhārehi duppaññehi sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo dukkhogāhā, alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tesu paṭivedhassāpi atthasannissitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘atthagambhīratāpaṭivedhagambhīratāhi sāttha’’nti atthaguṇadīpanato. Tāsaṃ dhammadesanānaṃ byañjanasannissitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammagambhīratādesanāgambhīratāhi sabyañjana’’nti tāsaṃ byañjanasampattidīpanato.
于诸义中,分类而转的智为义无碍解。于义、法、辞、辩无碍解中,分类而转的智为辩无碍解。由于此辩无碍解也以义为境,故说“以义无碍解与辩无碍解之境为具义”,因为若无义的成就,它便不存在。“法”指经教。“辞”指拣择经教之词而说。其中,分类而转的智为法无碍解与辞无碍解,故说“以法无碍解与辞无碍解之境为具文”,因为若无文辞的成就,它便不存在。“令审察者生信”中,iti一字表原因。因为能令审察、寻求何为善者生信,故为具义。义成就者,犹如由河水涨满推知上游降雨,以果推因。而其具义性,为智者所能觉知故,当知最为深奥、微细、微妙,正如经中所说:“深奥、难见……”等等。令世间人生信,故为具文;因为能令世间人生信,故为具文。世间人因文辞成就而喜悦,此处亦以果推因。而其具文性,由可信仰故,当知为初善等性。显示巴利原文
Atthesu pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā. Atthadhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsu pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāti imissāpi paṭisambhidāya atthavisayattā āha ‘‘atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāvisayato sāttha’’nti, atthasampattiyā asati tadabhāvato. Dhammoti tanti . Niruttīti tantipadānaṃ niddhāretvā vacanaṃ. Tattha pabhedagatāni ñāṇāni dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāti āha ‘‘dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāvisayato sabyañjananti, asati byañjanasampattiyā tadabhāvato. Parikkhakajanappasādakanti ettha iti-saddo hetuattho. Yasmā parikkhakajanānaṃ kiṃkusalagavesīnaṃ pasādāvahaṃ, tasmā sātthaṃ. Atthasampannanti phalena hetuno anumānaṃ nadīpūrena viya upari vuṭṭhippavattiyā. Sātthakatā panassa paṇḍitavedanīyatāya, sā paramagambhīrasaṇhasukhumabhāvato veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘gambhīro duddaso’’tiādi (mahāva. 8). Lokiyajanappasādakanti sabyañjananti yasmā lokiyajanassa pasādāvahaṃ, tasmā sabyañjanaṃ. Lokiyajano hi byañjanasampattiyā tussati, idhāpi phalena hetuno anumānaṃ. Sabyañjanatā panassa saddheyyatāya, sā ādikalyāṇādibhāvato veditabbā.
或者,为智者所能觉知故为具义,即说以慧为依处而义成就,由此令审察者生信。由可信仰故为具文,即说以信为依处而文辞成就,由此令世间人生信。于此,应如是见其义。由深奥意趣故为具义,即由意趣不可测度、无有彼岸故,义成就,否则便无此义。由文句显了故,为具文,即由易解的音声故,文辞成就,因为即使是最深奥的义,也能令所化众生易了知。当知,这一切是先前所说两种义的分化,各处注释亦如此。同样,此处不取分别或合集之义。应纳入者,即应加入的清净义,因无有未说者故。由全体圆满故,即由一切部分圆满故。应去除者,即杂染法。显示巴利原文
Atha vā paṇḍitavedanīyato sāttha’’nti paññāpadaṭṭhānatāya atthasampannataṃ āha, tato parikkhakajanappasādakaṃ. Saddheyyato sabyañjananti saddhāpadaṭṭhānatāya byañjanasampannataṃ, tato lokiyajanappasādakanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Gambhīrādhippāyato sātthanti adhippāyato agādhāpāratāya atthasampannaṃ aññathā tadabhāvato. Uttānapadato sabyañjananti subodhasaddatāya byañjanasampannaṃ, paramagambhīrassapi atthassa veneyyānaṃ suviññeyyabhāvāpādanato. Sabbopesa paṭhamassa atthadvayassa pabhedo daṭṭhabbo, tathā ceva tattha tattha saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Tathā hettha vikappassa, samuccayassa vā aggahaṇaṃ. Upanetabbassāti pakkhipitabbassa vodānatthassa avuttassa abhāvato. Sakalaparipuṇṇabhāvenāti sabbabhāgehi paripuṇṇatāya. Apanetabbassāti saṃkilesadhammassa.
由行道,即由戒清净等正行道,以此为因。由证得明达,即因谛现观而有证得明达,故为具义,不像迦毗罗等虚论那样空虚无义,而是义成就。由教理,即由熟悉教理之法。由多闻明达,即不像于恶说之法中熟悉者那样产生迷惑,而是有多闻明达,故为具文。因为有文辞成就,方有多闻明达。由戒等五法蕴具足故,即由戒等五种法蕴不相离故。一切圆满,即无余、周遍圆满、充满。由无随烦恼故,即无见、慢等随烦恼故。为度脱故,即为出离轮回之苦故。由不希求世间利养故,即无论如何也不依止渴爱之依止故。显示巴利原文
Paṭipattiyāti sīlavisuddhiyādisammāpaṭipattiyā, tannimittaṃ. Adhigamabyattitoti saccapaṭivedhena adhigamaveyyattiyasabbhāvato sātthaṃ kapilavatādi viya tucchaṃ niratthakaṃ ahutvā atthasampannanti katvā. Pariyattiyāti pariyattidhammaparicayena. Āgamabyattitoti durakkhātadhammesu paricayaṃ karontassa viya sammohaṃ ajanetvā bāhusaccaveyyattiyasabbhāvato sabyañcanaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā hi sati āgamabyattīti. Sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhayuttatoti sīlādīhi pañcahi dhammakoṭṭhāsehi avirahitattā. Kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ anavasesena samantato puṇṇaṃ pūritaṃ. Nirupakkilesatoti diṭṭhimānādiupakkilesābhāvato. Nittharaṇatthāyāti vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇāya. Lokāmisanirapekkhatoti kathañcipi taṇhāsannissayassa anissayanato.
如此,以“初善”等名号,依于大师的前二无畏而阐明法的善说性之后,现在为再依后二无畏显示其义,而说“或者,由于没有义理的颠倒,故是善说、善宣告”,并以遮诠的方式解释其义,宣说“正如……”等。其中,“陷入颠倒”是指:对于那些被说为“障碍法”的诸法,因为它们并非障碍(并无障碍之实),其果报等并非决定性地成为堕恶趣之因。“由于非出离性”是指:由于并非无欲(仍有执著),以及对于那些被说为“能出离轮回”的诸法,如某些外道教派的仪式、凡夫的知识等,因它们并非真正能从此轮回出离,故反而是颠倒。“因此”是指:由于义理上的颠倒,他们(那些外道)陷入颠倒。“由于不超越其如实的自性”是指:业障等五种障碍的障碍性,以及圣道诸法的出离性,是任何时候都不会被超越的。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ādikalyāṇatādiapadesena satthu purimavesārajjadvayavasena dhammassa svākkhātataṃ vibhāvetvā idāni pacchimavesārajjadvayavasenāpi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atthavipallāsābhāvato vā suṭṭhu akkhātoti svākkhāto’’ti vatvā tamatthaṃ byatirekamukhena vibhāvento ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha vipallāsamāpajjatīti tesaṃ dhamme ‘‘antarāyikā’’ti vuttadhammānaṃ vipākādīnaṃ antarāyikattābhāvato ekaṃsena apāyūpapattihetutāya abhāvato. Niyyānikattābhāvatoti atammayatābhāvato, saṃsārato ca niyyānikāti vuttadhammānaṃ ekaccayaññakiriyāpakatipurisantaraññāṇādīnaṃ tato niyyānikattābhāvato viparīto eva hoti. Tenāti atthassa vipallāsāpajjanena. Te aññatitthiyā. Tathābhāvānatikkamanatoti kammantarāyādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ antarāyikabhāvassa ariyamaggadhammānaṃ niyyānikabhāvassa kadācipi anativattanato.
“与涅槃相应的修行”:意思是,宣说了与应当证得、远离一切有为的涅槃相应的修行,此修行作为出离一切行的方便,并带有前行分。这是(句子的)连接。“与行道相应的(涅槃)”:指与那样的行道相应的涅槃,该行道能出离一切苦,仅仅作为所缘,烦恼也不能染污它。“善施设”:指由戒等三蕴所摄,以正见等为分类,通过断除邪见等的方式,被妥善、正确地安立。相合:由于烦恼垢的清净而相合。如此,通过道与涅槃在行道与行者状态上彼此相应而显示了善说性之后,现在为了分别显示三种出世间法各自的善说性,而说“其中,圣道……”等。其中,“二边”指:常见与断见,沉湎欲乐与自我折磨,昏沉与掉举,住著与策进——如此分类的二边。“不趋近”:指不趋近,或者是不趋近的原因。“已止息的烦恼”:指已妥善寂止的烦恼,以寂止断除的方式,正确地断除了过失。“依于常等自性”:指依于在诸经中赞叹常等自性的方式,如“比丘们,我将为你们宣说常法、不死法、庇护法、皈依处法”等。显示巴利原文
Nibbānānurūpāya paṭipattiyāti adhigantabbassa sabbasaṅkhatavinissaṭassa nibbānassa anurūpāya sabbasaṅkhāranissaraṇūpāyabhūtāya sapubbabhāgāya sammāpaṭipattiyā akkhātattāti yojanā. Paṭipadānurūpassāti sabbadukkhaniyyānikabhūtā ārammaṇakaraṇamattenāpi kilesehi anāmasanīyā yādisī paṭipadā, tadanurūpassa. Supaññattāti sīlādikkhandhattayasaṅgahitā sammādiṭṭhiādippabhedā micchādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ pahāyikabhāvena suṭṭhu sammadeva vihitā. Saṃsandati kilesamalavisuddhitāya sameti. Evaṃ magganibbānānaṃ paṭipadāpaṭipajjanīyabhāvehi aññamaññānurūpatāya svākkhātataṃ dassetvā idāni tividhassāpi lokuttaradhammassa paccekaṃ svākkhātataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ariyamaggo cetthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha antadvayanti sassatucchedaṃ, kāmasukhaattakilamathānuyogaṃ, līnuddhaccaṃ, patiṭṭhānāyūhananti evaṃ pabhedaṃ antadvayaṃ. Anupagammāti anupagantvā, anupagamanahetu vā. Paṭipassaddhakilesānīti suṭṭhu vūpasantakilesāni, paṭipassaddhippahānavasena sammadeva pahīnadosāni. Sassatādisabhāvavasenāti ‘‘sassatañca vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi amatañca tāṇañca leṇañcā’’tiādinā tesu tesu suttesu sassatādibhāvakittanavasena.
148 “应由断除贪等的圣者亲自见”一句,意思是:“我的贪等已被圣道断除”,如此由自己、不依他人引导而见,故称“现见的”,现见本身即是“现见性的”。显示巴利原文
148.‘‘Rāgādīnaṃ abhāvaṃ karontena ariyapuggalena sāmaṃ daṭṭhabbo’’ti iminā ‘‘ariyamaggena mama rāgādayo pahīnā’’ti sayaṃ attanā anaññaneyyena daṭṭhabboti sandiṭṭhi, sandiṭṭhi eva sandiṭṭhiko.
圣弟子们舍弃了依靠他人信仰、他人信解、随他人引导而行的状态,也舍弃了须由他人告知的状态,而以省察智为工具。殊胜之见为现见,正如正觉支一般。圣道依与之相应的现见而克胜烦恼;圣果依作为其因的现见而克胜烦恼;涅槃依作为所缘、成为其境域的现见而克胜烦恼。这便是句子的连结。显示巴利原文
Tenatena ariyasāvakena parasaddhāya parassa saddahanena paraneyyena gantabbataṃ hitvā ñāpetabbataṃ pahāya paccavekkhaṇañāṇena karaṇabhūtena. Pasatthā diṭṭhi sandiṭṭhi yathā sambojjhaṅgo. Ariyamaggo attanā sampayuttāya sandiṭṭhiyā kilese jayati, ariyaphalaṃ tāya eva attano kāraṇabhūtāya, nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇena attano visayībhūtāya sandiṭṭhiyā kilese jayatīti yojanā.
道法属于修习现观。涅槃法属于作证现观。果则处于下位,作为斯陀含观等之缘,由于是上位道证得的亲依止缘,故在间接意义上,可获得‘现见的法能遮止轮回怖畏’这样的说法。显示巴利原文
Bhāvanābhisamayavasena maggadhammo. Sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nibbānadhammo. Phalampi heṭṭhimaṃ sakadāgāmivipassanādīnaṃ paccayabhāvena upari maggādhigamassa upanissayabhāvato pariyāyato ‘‘dissamāno vaṭṭabhayaṃ nivattetī’’ti vattabbataṃ labhati.
149 ‘无时’是指:它没有需要等待的时间。正如世间善法在给予果报时有需要等待的时间,所谓‘于下一生,或于后后之转起’等,但此法并非如此,这便是其义。因此说‘不是五天后’等。‘远’是指遥远。对于给予果报,时间遥远,故谓之‘有时的’,即经过一段时间才给予果报的。因此说‘在给予自己的果报上’。‘已到达’是指已被带来。‘此’即指‘无时性’一词。显示巴利原文
149.Nāssakāloti nāssa āgametabbo kālo atthi. Yathā hi lokiyakusalassa ‘‘upapajje, aparapariyāye’’tiādinā phaladānaṃ pati āgametabbo kālo atthi, na evametassāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘na pañcāhā’’tiādi. Pakaṭṭhoti dūro. Phaladānaṃ pati kālo pakaṭṭho assāti kāliko, kālantaraphaladāyī. Tenāha ‘‘attano phaladāne’’ti. Pattoti upanīto. Idanti ‘‘akāliko’’ti padaṃ.
150 “方法”是指安排、规定,即“来,看!”这样进行的规定之语。“由于存在”是指由于在胜义上可被获得。“由于清净”是指由于远离烦恼垢而完全清净。即使是不令人喜爱的,有时也会为了某种目的,通过显示其如实自性而应被开示,为了显示没有这种情况,而说“通过显示令人喜爱的状态”。显示巴利原文
150.Vidhinti vidhānaṃ, ‘‘ehi passā’’ti evaṃpavattavidhivacanaṃ. Vijjamānattāti paramatthato upalabbhamānattā. Parisuddhattāti kilesamalavirahena sabbathā visuddhattā. Amanuññampi kadāci payojanavasena yathāsabhāvappakāsanena dassetabbaṃ bhaveyyāti tadabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘manuññabhāvappakāsanenā’’ti.
151 “应被引导近前”(upanetabbo)即应被引导者,此应被引导者即是“可引导近前的”(opaneyyika)。由于此义是所意趣的,故说“应被引导近前者,即是可引导近前的”。将法引导近前于心,即是令其生起,因此说“这适用于有为的出世间法”。然而,若将“引导近前于心”理解为将作为所缘的法导至所缘的状态,则也适用于无为法,即“值得进行名为‘作为所缘’的引导近前,故为可引导近前的”。“附着”即触,意思是:涅槃将圣者引导近前。显示巴利原文
151. Upanetabboti upaneyyo, upaneyyova opaneyyikoti imassa atthassa adhippetattā āha ‘‘upanetabboti opaneyyiko’’ti. Citte upanayanaṃ uppādananti āha ‘‘idaṃ saṅkhate lokuttaradhamme yujjatī’’ti. Citte upanayananti pana ārammaṇabhūtassa dhammassa ārammaṇabhāvūpanayane adhippete asaṅkhatepi yujjeyya ‘‘ārammaṇakaraṇasaṅkhātaṃ upanayanaṃ arahatīti opaneyyiko’’ti. Allīyananti phusanaṃ. Nibbānaṃ upaneti ariyapuggalanti adhippāyo.
152 “由智者们”(viññūhi)是指由明智者,即已通达真理者,这是它的含义。而他们必定是顿悟者等,因此说“由顿悟者等”。“各自的”(paccattaṃ)一词,应依处格之义理解为“于自己、于自己”,故说“于自己、于自己”。“应被了知”已说,如何应被了知呢?因而说“我已修习……”等。其中,以“我”字显示了与“各自的”一词所表达之义的同义关系后,再以遮诠显示,说“因为不是……”等,这很容易理解。为了显示“由智者们”一词含有简别之义,故说“然而,这不是愚者们的境界”。显示巴利原文
152.Viññūhīti vidūhi, paṭividdhasaccehīti attho. Te pana ekaṃsato ugghaṭitaññūādayo hontīti āha ‘‘ugghaṭitaññūādīhī’’ti. ‘‘Paccatta’’nti etassa ‘‘pati attanī’’ti bhummavasena attho gahetabboti āha ‘‘attani attanī’’ti. Veditabboti vuttaṃ, kathaṃ veditabboti āha ‘‘bhāvito me’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘me’’ti iminā ‘‘paccatta’’nti padena vuttamatthaṃ anvayato dassetvā puna byatirekena dassetuṃ ‘‘na hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva. ‘‘Viññūhī’’ti idaṃ antogadhāvadhāraṇanti dassento ‘‘bālānaṃ pana avisayo cesā’’ti āha.
如此,以“初善”等显示了教法与前后相应的善说性之后,现在为说明前句是后句的理由,而宣说“而且”等。其中,“现见的”:因为此法是依前述方式可亲自证见的,以现见摧破烦恼,且值得展示,故为善说;而外道恶说之法则无此。依此道理,其余诸句也应随宜了知其义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ādikalyāṇatādinā aññamaññassa anurūpadesanāya dhammassa svākkhātataṃ dassetvā idāni purimassa purimassa pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ padaṃ kāraṇavacananti dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sandiṭṭhikattāti yasmā ayaṃ dhammo vuttanayena sāmaṃ daṭṭhabbo, sandiṭṭhiyā kilese viddhaṃseti, sandassanañca arahati, tasmā svākkhāto durakkhāte titthiyadhamme tadabhāvato. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi yathārahaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo.
153 153. 在“彼之”等语句中,应说的内容,当依佛随念中所说的方法来了解。显示巴利原文
153.Tassevantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ buddhānussatiyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
三、僧随念论释显示巴利原文
3. Saṅghānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
154 154. “圣僧团的功德”:所谓圣僧团,因远离诸烦恼,因不行非道而行正道,且因被含括天人的世间视为“皈依处”而应受忆念,故彼既是圣者又是僧团,或为圣者们的僧团,即圣僧团;此即其功德。显示巴利原文
154.Ariyasaṅghaguṇāti ārakattā kilesehi, anaye na iriyanato, aye ca iriyanato, sadevakena ca lokena ‘‘saraṇa’’nti araṇīyato ariyo ca so saṅgho ca, ariyānaṃ vā saṅgho ariyasaṅgho, tassa guṇā.
155 正确地行道,即被称为“善行道”。那圣道的行道,以断除敌对法使其成为不退转法;由于无需再作功用,其自身也是不退转法;又对于应证得的涅槃,它是一向随顺的。正因如此,它是不违逆的,且是随法之法。为了显示正因为行于此道,圣僧团才被称为“善行道”,故说“善行道”等。其中,以“不退转行道”显示正直行道,因为若屡屡退转,则非正直行道。以“随顺行道”与“不违逆行道”显示如理行道,因为随顺应证得的涅槃且不违逆,故为如理。以“法随法行道”显示正当行道,因其表明了随顺合宜的状态。由此,显示了第一句是广说,其余三句是细说。因此说“然而因为”等。显示巴利原文
155. Yaṃ sammāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno ‘‘suṭṭhu paṭipanno’’ti vuccati. Sā ariyamaggapaṭipadā paṭipakkhadhamme anivattidhamme katvā pajahanato payojanābhāvā sayampi anivattidhammā, adhigantabbassa ca nibbānassa ekaṃsato anulomīti. Tato eva apaccanīkā, anudhammabhūtā ca, tassā ca paṭipannattā ariyasaṅgho ‘‘suppaṭipanno’’ti vuttoti dassetuṃ ‘‘suṭṭhu paṭipanno’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘anivattipaṭipada’’nti iminā ujuppaṭipattiṃ dasseti. Punappunaṃ nivattane hi sati ujuppaṭipatti na hoti. ‘‘Anulomapaṭipadaṃ apaccanīkapaṭipada’’nti iminā ñāyappaṭipattiṃ. Paṭipajjitabbassa hi nibbānassa anulomanena, apaccanīkatāya cassā ñāyato. ‘‘Dhammānudhammapaṭipada’’nti iminā sāmīcippaṭipattiṃ anucchavikabhāvadīpanato. Etena paṭhamapadassa papañcaniddeso, itarāni tīṇi padānīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi.
由于依教奉行而成就所作,故能带来圣者状态的听闻,称为恭敬听闻,因此说“恭敬听闻者,即弟子”,以此显示唯有圣者才是究竟意义上的导师弟子。以戒与见之共性:即依圣戒与圣见而具有相同性。因为圣者们的戒与见,如同中间断裂的黄金一样,由于由道而来,故无差别。因此,他们无论处于何处,皆是和合一致的。因此说“已成就和合状态”。以断除谄、诳等恶法而为正直。正因如此,无如牛尿般的弯曲,故为不弯。无如新月般的弯曲,故为不曲。无如犁头般的弯曲,故为不邪。或者,以不弯等状态而为正直。以清净义而为圣。以无过失的状态,能知、能行向涅槃,或依此而知、而证悟涅槃,故为如理。因为适合出离轮回之苦。由于随顺、适合,故正当行道亦被称为“正当的”、“合宜的”。因具足此,故为善行道,即“正确地行道”。因为此“行道”一词是现在时义,如“为证得须陀洹果而行道者”。过去行道,指如前所说的道之正行道。以此两者,或以共通说明,或以“善行道、善行道、善行道”的省略方式,显示所摄之众被称为“善行道”。显示巴利原文
Yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjanena kiccasiddhito ariyabhāvāvahaṃ savanaṃ sakkaccasavanaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sakkaccaṃ suṇantīti sāvakā’’ti, tena ariyā eva nippariyāyato satthu sāvakā nāmāti dasseti. Sīladiṭṭhisāmaññatāyāti ariyena sīlena, ariyāya ca diṭṭhiyā samānabhāvena. Ariyānañhi sīladiṭṭhiyo majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya ninnānākaraṇaṃ maggenāgatattā. Tena te yattha katthaci ṭhitāpi saṃhatāva. Tenāha ‘‘saṅghātabhāvamāpanno’’ti. Māyāsāṭheyyādipāpadhammasamucchedena uju. Tato eva gomuttavaṅkābhāvena avaṅkā. Candalekhāvaṅkābhāvena akuṭilā. Naṅgalakoṭivaṅkābhāvena ajimhā. Avaṅkādibhāvena vā uju. Parisuddhaṭṭhena ariyā. Apaṇṇakabhāvena ñāyati kamati nibbānaṃ, taṃ vā ñāyati paṭivijjhīyati etenāti ñāyo. Vaṭṭadukkhaniyyānāya anucchavikattā. Anurūpattā sāmīci opāyikātipi saṅkhaṃ samaññaṃ gatā sammāpaṭipatti, tāya samaṅgitāya suppaṭipannā ‘‘sammā paṭipajjantī’’ti katvā. Vattamānattho hi ayaṃ paṭipanna-saddo yathā ‘‘sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno’’ti (pu. pa. 206). Atītaṃ paṭipadanti yathāvuttamaggasammāpaṭipattiṃ vadati. Ubhayena ca sāmaññaniddesena, ‘‘suppaṭipannā ca suppaṭipannā ca suppaṭipannā’’ti ekasesanayena vā gahitānaṃ samūho ‘‘suppaṭipanno’’ti vuttoti dasseti.
如此,以解释首句之义的方式说明了其余诸句之义后,现在为了显示四句不混杂之义,而说“而且”等。其中,“依所教”即依导师所教导的那样,随顺教诫之义。“无过失行道”即无错误行道,无过失修行之义。此处应如此连接:因在善说的法律中行无过失行道。若与首句连接,第二句是否不应说?若与第二句连接,第一句是否也不应说?并非如此,因为第一句是所期待的前提。为了显示弟子们的无过失行道即是依教行道,故应说“因依所教而行”。或者,因为两者皆能成就善行道状态,故两者皆说。确实,以“且”字将两者总括。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ādipadatthaniddesabhāvena itarapadānaṃ atthaṃ vatvā idāni catunnampi padānaṃ avomissakaṃ atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathānusiṭṭhanti satthārā yathā anusiṭṭhaṃ, tathā anusāsanīanurūpanti attho. Apaṇṇakapaṭipadanti avirajjhanakapaṭipadaṃ, anavajjapaṭipattinti attho. Ettha ca svākkhāte dhammavinaye apaṇṇakapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannattāti evaṃ sambandhitabbaṃ. Purimapadena sambandhe dutiyapadaṃ na vattabbaṃ siyā, nanu ca dutiyapadena sambandhepi paṭhamaṃ padaṃ na vattabbaṃ siyāti? Na tassa paṭhamaṃ apekkhitattā. Sā pana sāvakānaṃ apaṇṇakapaṭipadā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipadāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipannattā’’ti vattabbaṃ . Ubhayassāpi vā suppaṭipannabhāvasādhanattā ubhayaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā hi pi-saddena ubhayaṃ samuccinoti.
由于烦恼的邪曲而执取两端,在彻底断除它之后,能断除身等之曲的正行道,便是正直之行。因此说“以中道……正直而行”。显示巴利原文
Kilesajimhavasena antadvayagāhoti sabbaso taṃ pahāya sammāpaṭipadā kāyādivaṅkappahāyinī ujuppaṭipatti hotīti āha ‘‘majjhimāya paṭipadāya…pe… ujuppaṭipanno’’ti.
所谓“如理”,是契合、通达的行道,也是涅槃。因为它能寂止一切诸行,即使衣燃、头燃亦应不顾而修行。故说“如理即是涅槃”。此处应知,涅槃是通过寂灭作用之门而说;或者,因以道智等而了知、证悟、作证,故涅槃为如理。其义当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Ñāyo nāma yuttappattapaṭipatti, nibbānañca, sabbasaṅkhārasamathatāya ādittaṃ celaṃ, sīsaṃ vā ajjhupekkhitvāpi paṭipajjitabbamevāti āha ‘‘ñāyo vuccati nibbāna’’nti. Nibbāyanakiriyāmukhena cettha nibbānaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ , maggañāṇādīhi vā ñāyati paṭivijjhīyati sacchikarīyati cāti ñāyo nibbānanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
由于功德的崇敬,堪受他人所作的承事、礼敬等正当行为,故为应受正当行为者。显示巴利原文
Guṇasambhāvanāya parehi kayiramānaṃ paccupaṭṭhānādisāmīcikammaṃ arahantīti sāmīcikammārahā.
156 “Yadidaṃ”是不变词,内含性、数、格的差别,因此以词的差别来说明其义,即“yā imāni”。“Evaṃ”是表示方式的不变词,义为“以此方式”。由此,其余三对也被显示出来,故说“如此则有四种人双对”。“Etaṃ”是指以复数形式所说的“purisapuggalā”一词。既是人又是士夫,故称“人、士夫”。其中,“purisā”指第一类本性,“puggalā”亦指第二类,以七种共通性而言;或者,应如此理解此处的意义。四种应供者是什么呢?从“应被请来供养”这一总说中,其义已明。“Dātabbaṃ”这一主格词,应随“四种应供者”一词转为属格来理解,否则任何四种应供者都可能被称为“āhuna”。“Āhunaṃ arahati”即“应受供养”,或“āhuneyyo”。或者,对于帝释天等,也有“āhavana”(供养),即由帝释天等所施的布施。“Yattha hutaṃ mahapphalaṃ”意为:在哪个应供养火中,所供的酪等,比起应供养火、家主火、应施火中的供养,有更大的果报,这是那些显示巴利原文
156.Yadidanti antogadhaliṅgavacanabhedo nipātoti tassa vacanabhedena atthamāha ‘‘yā imānī’’ti. Evanti pakāratthe nipāto, iminā pakārenāti attho. Tena itarāni tīṇi yugaḷāni dassitāni hontīti āha ‘‘evaṃ cattāri purisayugaḷāni hontī’’ti. Etanti etaṃ ‘‘purisapuggalā’’ti bahuvacanavasena vuttaṃ padaṃ. Purisā ca te puggalā ca purisapuggalā. Tattha ‘‘purisā’’ti iminā paṭhamāya pakatiyā gahaṇaṃ, ‘‘puggalā’’ti pana dutiyāyapi sattasāmaññenāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ kīdisānaṃ? Ānetvā hunitabbānanti adhikārato pākaṭoyamattho. Dātabbanti vā paccattavacanaṃ ‘‘catunnaṃ paccayāna’’nti padaṃ apekkhitvā sāmivasena pariṇāmetabbaṃ, aññathā yesaṃ kesañci catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ ‘‘āhuna’’nti samaññā siyā. Āhunaṃ arahatīti vā āhuneyyo. Sakkādīnampi vā āhavananti sakkādīhipi diyyamānaṃ dānaṃ. Yattha hutaṃ mahapphalanti yasmiṃ āvahanīyaggimhi hutaṃ dadhiādi āhuneyyaggigahapataggidakkhiṇeyyaggīsu hutato uḷāraphalanti tesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ laddhi. Hutanti dinnaṃ. Nikāyantareti sabbatthikavādinikāye.
“Ṭhapetvā”意为:除去那些可爱的亲友后,不施与他们,这是其意旨。“Esa eso”即此。“Ekabuddhantare ca dissati”意为:在一佛之隔过后可见。以“ca”字表示,有时历经无数劫后亦可见。“Abbokiṇṇaṃ”意为不被敌对者所混杂,这也是对行为的修饰。所谓可爱、可意之因的法,即戒等,这些在圣僧团中已善为安立。此处的意旨是:亲友离别后不久又会相聚,他们对彼此的爱乐并不稳定,而圣僧团则不然。因此,僧团才是应受款待者。“Pubbakāraṃ”指首要的行为。“Sabbappakārena”指以一切方式,即以尊重、恭敬、崇敬等,以及以对施物恭敬而行施等一切方式。而此“pāhavanīya”一词,同义即称为“pāhuneyyo”。显示巴利原文
Ṭhapetvā 165 teti te piyamanāpe ñātimitte apanetvā, tesaṃ adatvāti adhippāyo. Esa eso. Ekabuddhantare ca dissatīti ekasmiṃ buddhantare vītivatte dissati. Ca-saddena kadāci asaṅkhyeyyepi kappe vītivatteti dasseti. Abbokiṇṇanti paṭipakkhehi avomissaṃ, kiriyāvisesakañcetaṃ. Piyamanāpattakaradhammā nāma sīlādayo, te ariyasaṅghe suppatiṭṭhitā. Ayaṃ hettha adhippāyo – ñātimittā vippayuttā na cirasseva samāgacchanti, anavaṭṭhitā ca tesu piyamanāpatā, na evamariyasaṅgho. Tasmā saṅghova pāhuneyyoti. Pubbakāranti aggakiriyaṃ. Sabbappakārenāti ādaragāravabahumānādinā, deyyadhammassa sakkaccakaraṇādinā ca sabbena pakārena. Svāyaṃ pāhavanīya-saddo ‘‘pāhuneyyo’’ti vuccati pariyāyabhāvena.
众生依此而随所愿成就增长,故称“dakkhiṇā”(布施)。以能成就如此状态,而应受布施。如同因获得广大、极多的利益而被称为清净,同样,布施因具有广大果报,故说“以能生广大果而清净”。显示巴利原文
Dakkhanti etāya sattā yathādhippetāhi sampattīhi vaḍḍhantīti dakkhiṇā. Tathābhāvakaraṇena dakkhiṇaṃ arahati. Yathā uḷārātivipuludrayalābhena visodhitaṃ nāma hoti, evaṃ dakkhiṇā vipulaphalatāyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘mahapphalakaraṇatāya visodhetī’’ti.
为求功德者,应于此处合掌,故称“应合掌者”。显示巴利原文
Puññatthikehi añjali karaṇīyā etthāti añjalikaraṇīyo.
虽然圣典中说“anuttaraṃ”(无上),然而“anuttaraṃ”意为“没有比此更上、更殊胜的”。为了显示没有与其相等者,故说“asadisaṃ”(无比)。所撒播的种子,因能令其结出硕果,故而保护、守护它;或者,人们在此播撒、种植种子,所以称为“khettaṃ”(田),如水田等。如同田一样,作为种植福德之田,故称“puññakkhettaṃ”(福田)。其余应依随念佛陀中所说的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Yadipi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘anuttara’’nti vuttaṃ. Natthi ito uttaraṃ visiṭṭhanti hi anuttaraṃ. Samampissa pana natthīti dassento ‘‘asadisa’’nti āha. Khittaṃ vuttaṃ bījaṃ mahapphalabhāvakaraṇena tāyati rakkhati, khipanti vapanti ettha bījānīti vā khettaṃ, kedārādi, khettaṃ viya khettaṃ, puññānaṃ khettaṃ puññakkhettaṃ. Sesaṃ buddhānussatiyaṃ vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ.
四、戒随念论释显示巴利原文
4. Sīlānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
158 “Aho vata sīlāni akhaṇḍāni, aho vata acchiddānī”——应于一切处如此配合。“Aho vata”是表示赞叹的不变词。因此说“以无破损等功德”,意思是“以成就无破损等功德”。当随念他人的戒时,由于能带来可爱、可意的境界,仅成为慈心的近因,而非独立的业处,故说“应随念自己的戒”。在布施等方面,也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
158. Aho vata sīlāni akhaṇḍāni, aho vata acchiddānīti evaṃ sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Aho vatāti ca sambhāvane nipāto. Tenāha ‘‘akhaṇḍatādiguṇavasenā’’ti. Akhaṇḍabhāvādisampattivasenāti attho. Parassa sīlāni anussariyamānāni piyamanāpabhāvāvahanena kevalaṃ mettāya padaṭṭhānaṃ honti, na visuṃ kammaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘attano sīlāni anussaritabbānī’’ti. Cāgādīsupi eseva nayo.
“Yesaṃ”指戒等。如果按次第受持,就依受持的次第;如果一时总受,就依说示的次第,由此应知戒的始末。如同在边缘或末端割破的衣服,这是一个不恰当的譬喻;其余譬喻也是如此。以穿透方式割破的衣服,就是被穿透割裂的衣服。如同用不同颜色的牛,这是关联。无杂色的,或“asabalāni”;同样地,“akammāsāni”。七种淫欲的结合,在下文关于戒的论说中已述。以“忿、恨等”,“等”字包含了覆、恼、嫉、悭、诳、谄、慢、过慢等。那些正是无破等功德的戒。戒从渴爱的奴役中解脱,即成就了通向解脱的依止。正因为如此,具足戒的人成为自主、自在、解脱者,所以说“以成就解脱而称为‘bhujissāni’”。诸如“以此戒,我或成为天,或成为某类天,在那里是常、恒、永久的”,“以戒得清净”,由于不被渴爱与邪见所执取,故说这些是戒的过失。在四种失败中,以任何一种失败显现,都不能破坏、摧毁所执取者。能引生定的,即“samādhisaṃvattanikāni”。显示巴利原文
Yesanti sīlādīnaṃ. Paṭipāṭiyā samādāne samādānakkamena, ekajjhaṃ samādāne uddesakkamena sīlānaṃ ādiantaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pariyante chinnasāṭako viyāti vatthante, dasante vā chinnavatthaṃ viya, visadisūdāharaṇaṃ cetaṃ. Evaṃ sesānipi udāharaṇāni. Vinivedhavasena chinnasāṭako vinividdhasāṭako. Visabhāgavaṇṇena gāvī viyāti sambandho. Sabalarahitāni vā asabalāni. Tathā akammāsāni. Sattavidhamethunasaṃyogo heṭṭhā sīlakathāyaṃ vutto eva. Kodhūpanāhādīhīti ādi-saddena makkhapaḷāsaissāmacchariyamāyāsāṭheyyamānātimānādayo gahitā. Tāniyeva akhaṇḍādiguṇāni sīlāni. Sīlassa taṇhādāsabyato mocanaṃ vivaṭṭūpanissayabhāvāpādanaṃ. Tato eva taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo serī sayaṃvasī bhujisso nāma hoti. Tenāha ‘‘bhujissabhāvakaraṇena bhujissānī’’ti. ‘‘Imināhaṃ sīlena devo vā bhaveyyaṃ devaññataro vā, tattha nicco dhuvo sassato’’ti, ‘‘sīlena suddhī’’ti ca evamādinā taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattā ayaṃ te sīlesu dosoti catūsu vipattīsu yāya kāyaci vipattiyā dassanena parāmaṭṭhuṃ anuddhaṃsetuṃ. Samādhisaṃvattanappayojanāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni.
159 “Sikkhāya sagāravo”意为:由于依止戒财而获得殊胜的受持,因此对学处倍加尊重、恭敬。“Sabhāgavuttī”意为:与具足戒者共住,或即以此学处而共住。若人没有对学处的尊重,由于相违,他就成了与此不同住者。如同与人相处时自己没有隔阂,同样地,以法施和财施来款待,便是“paṭisanthāro”。正因为对学处有尊重,所以对此不放逸。自谴的怖畏、他谴的怖畏、刑罚的怖畏、恶趣的怖畏等,这些怖畏已被远远抛弃,故说“离自谴等怖畏”。其余容易理解。显示巴利原文
159.Sikkhāya sagāravoti sīladhanaṃ nissāya paṭiladdhasamādānattā sātisayaṃ sikkhāya sagāravo sappatisso hoti. Sabhāgavuttīti sampannasīlehi sabhāgavuttiko, tāya eva vā sikkhāya sabhāgavutti. Yo hi sikkhāgāravarahito, so tāya visabhāgavutti nāma hoti vilomanato. Yathā parehi saddhiṃ attano chiddaṃ na hoti, evaṃ dhammāmisehi paṭisantharaṇaṃ paṭisanthāro. Sikkhāya sagāravattā eva tattha appamatto hoti. Attānuvādabhayaṃ parānuvādabhayaṃ daṇḍabhayaṃ duggatibhayanti evamādīni bhayāni imassa dūrasamussāritānīti āha ‘‘attānuvādādibhayavirahito’’ti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
五、舍随念论释显示巴利原文
5. Cāgānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
160 “本性”即自性。“以舍为志向者”指在应施之物的舍弃上致力、投入、倾向、朝向。恒常不断地行持布施与分配者,称为恒常行持布施与分配者。此处也应将“本性”一词引来加以联系。为他人准备而给予的,是布施。将自己应受用的分与出去,是分配。“从今以后”即从此刻开始,以今日为始。立下“不施舍便不食用”的布施誓愿。在那一天,即在开始修习的那一天。在那里取相,即在那布施中,通过观察舍离思心所的活动行相而取相。依远离垢悭等功德,即由此而远离垢悭,是为舍离;其状态为远离垢悭性。依这些功德、成就或利益。显示巴利原文
160.Pakatiyāti sabhāvena. Cāgādhimuttenāti deyyadhammapariccāge yuttappayuttena tanninnena tappoṇena. Niccaṃ sadā pavattā dānasaṃvibhāgā yassa so niccapavattadānasaṃvibhāgo, tena. Idhāpi ‘‘pakatiyā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Yaṃ parassa paṭiyattaṃ diyyati, taṃ dānaṃ. Yaṃ attanā paribhuñjitabbato saṃvibhajati, so saṃvibhāgo. Ito dāni pabhutīti ito paṭṭhāya dāni ajjatagge ajjadivasaṃ ādiṃ katvā. Adatvā na bhuñjissāmīti dānasamādānaṃ katvā . Taṃdivasanti tasmiṃ bhāvanārambhadivase. Tattha nimittaṃ gaṇhitvāti tasmiṃ dāne pariccāgacetanāya pavattiākārassa sallakkhaṇavasena nimittaṃ gahetvā. Vigatamalamaccheratādiguṇavasenāti vigatāni malamaccherāni etasmāti vigatamalamacchero, cāgo, tassa bhāvo vigatamalamaccheratā. Tadādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ, sampattīnaṃ, ānisaṃsānaṃ vā vasena.
“随顺善士之法”即随顺、进入诸善士、菩萨的法脉传承,而不退转。这些是施主所获得的利益:寿命、容貌、快乐、力量、辩才等,以及世尊所称赞、宣说的可爱之相等。“或为人身”中的“或”字表示未说出的其他可能,由此应了知包含根力敏锐、业自作正见等。显示巴利原文
Sataṃdhammaṃ anukkamanti sādhūnaṃ bodhisattānaṃ dhammaṃ paveṇiṃ anu anu kamanto okkamanto, avokkamanto vā. Ye ime dāyakassa lābhā āyuvaṇṇasukhabalapaṭibhānādayo, piyabhāvādayo ca bhagavatā saṃvaṇṇitā pakittitā. Manussattaṃ vāti vā-saddo avuttavikappattho, tena indriyapāṭavabhāvakammassakatāñāṇādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“以悭吝之垢”:以名为悭吝的垢染;或指悭吝与垢染合为“悭吝之垢”,即以悭吝及贪等垢染之意。“依各各投生”:依各自所造业而投生。“黑法”:贪等一向黑暗的恶法。“已远离”:已断除。“以远离垢悭之心”:这是表示如此状态之相的具格用法。对于住在家中的须陀洹,即虽住在家而证得须陀洹者。“依止而住”:即应依止而住的住处,指每日所用的业处。“克服”:克服住家者所生起的贪等随烦恼。显示巴利原文
Maccheramalenāti maccherasaṅkhātena malena. Atha vā maccherañca malañca maccheramalaṃ, tena maccherena ceva lobhādimalena cāti attho. Pajāyanavasenāti yathāsakaṃ kammanibbattanavasena. Kaṇhadhammānanti lobhādiekantakāḷakānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ. Vigatattāti pahīnattā. Vigatamalamaccherena cetasāti itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ. Sotāpannassa satoti gehaṃ āvasantassa sotāpannassa samānassa. Nissayavihāranti nissāya viharitabbavihāraṃ, devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakakammaṭṭhānanti attho. Abhibhavitvāti agāraṃ āvasantānaṃ aññesaṃ uppajjanakarāgādiupakkilese abhibhuyya.
若有人虽作布施却仍怀期望,则非无著之施,而此人则不然,故说“无著之施”。“放舍之施”指无所期待的舍离。为显明如多行杀生者被称为“血手”,多行布施者被称为“净手”,故说“为施舍而常洗净手”。其中,“常”即恒常、频繁。“舍离”指应施之物的舍离,此由上下文可知。任何应施之物,他人即乞求者。乞求的相应即“乞求相应”,指适合被他人乞求。与施舍相应,即由恒常舍离而与布施相应。于两者,即于所说的布施与分配中,乐于、极乐于。显示巴利原文
Yo kiñci dentopi sāpekkhova deti, so muttacāgo na hoti, ayaṃ pana na evanti ‘‘muttacāgo’’ti vuttaṃ. Vissaṭṭhacāgoti nirapekkhapariccāgoti attho. Yathā pāṇātipātabahulo puggalo ‘‘lohitapāṇī’’ti vuccati, evaṃ dānabahulo puggalo ‘‘payatapāṇī’’ti vuttoti dassento ‘‘dātuṃ sadā dhotahatthoyevā’’ti āha. Tattha sadāti niccaṃ, abhiṇhanti attho. Pariccāgoti deyyadhammapariccāgoti adhikārato viññāyati. Yaṃ yaṃ deyyadhammaṃ pare yācanakā. Yācane yogo yācanayogo, parehi yācituṃ yuttoti attho. Yājena yuttoti dānena yutto sadā pariccajanato. Ubhayeti yathāvutte dāne, saṃvibhāge ca rato abhirato.
161 正如戒行清净者,依无缺等功德随念自己的戒,而成就戒随念修习;为显示具有清净广大舍离者,随念自己无染的舍离,而成就修习,故说“依远离垢、悭等功德”等语。其义已如前说。显示巴利原文
161. Yathā parisuddhasīlassa puggalassa akhaṇḍatādiguṇavasena attano sīlassa anussarantassa sīlānussatibhāvanā ijjhati, evaṃ parisuddhauḷārapariccāgassa puggalassa anupakkiliṭṭhameva attano pariccāgaṃ anussarantassa bhāvanā ijjhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘vigatamalamaccheratādiguṇavasenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ vuttatthameva.
“更胜”即更上。以广大之量,即以广大的尺度。“以舍为志向”是指志向于舍离,心倾向、朝向、趣向于彼。由此,即成为无贪之志向,于任何处心无系着。因对受施者修习慈心而行舍离,故为慈心、慈心修习的随顺行者、相应行道者。“明净”即清净,以自功德故,于任何处无有畏缩,克服而住。其余易知。显示巴利原文
Bhiyyosoti uparipi. Mattāya pamāṇassa mahatiyā mattāya, vipulena pamāṇenāti attho. Cāgādhimuttoti pariccāge adhimutto ninnapoṇapabbhāro. Tato eva alobhajjhāsayo katthacipi anabhisaṅgacitto. Paṭiggāhakesu mettāyanavasena pariccāgo hotīti mettāya mettābhāvanāya anulomakārī anurūpapaṭipatti. Visāradoti visado attanova guṇena katthacipi amaṅkubhūto abhibhuyya vihārī. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
六、天随念论注释显示巴利原文
6. Devatānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
162 “依圣道”即依证得圣道。“正生起”是指从彼处完全地生起而上升。因为圣者相续中的信等,即使是世间的,也绝非凡夫的信等所能比拟。“闪耀”故称为天。以四大王为主,故称四大王,他们即是四大王天。三十三位共同修福业者生于该处,彼共业之处即称三十三,他们所在的天亦因共业而称三十三天。已离苦、已远离,故为夜摩天。已至、已得喜乐,故为兜率天。于自所化的诸欲乐中欢喜,故为化乐天。于他化诸欲乐中自在而转,故为他化自在天。梵身即梵天众,因属于彼众而住于彼处,故称梵身天。“其上”即较梵身天更上,指少光天等。将天置于见证之位,即忆念:“以如是道而来的具足信、戒、闻、舍、慧的天人,从此处死后生于彼处;我亦具足如是信、戒、闻、舍、慧。”如此将天置于见证之位,如同引为见证一般,随念自己的信等功德。显示巴利原文
162.Ariyamaggavasenāti ariyamaggassa adhigamavasena. Samudāgatehīti sammadeva taduppattito uddhaṃ āgatehi. Yādisā hi ariyānaṃ santāne lokiyāpi saddhādayo, na tādisā kadācipi pothujjanikā saddhādayo. Dibbantīti devā. Cattāro mahārājāno etesanti catumahārājā, te eva cātumahārājikā. Tettiṃsa sahapuññakārino tatthūpapannāti taṃsahacaritaṃ ṭhānaṃ tāvatiṃsaṃ, tannivāsinopi devā taṃsahacaraṇato eva tāvatiṃsā. Dukkhato yātā apayātāti yāmā. Tusāya pītiyā itā upagatāti tusitā. Bhogānaṃ nimmāne rati etesanti nimmānaratino. Paranimmitesu bhogesu vasaṃ vattentīti paranimmitavasavattino. Brahmānaṃ kāyo samūho brahmakāyo, tappariyāpannatāya tattha bhavāti brahmakāyikā. Tatuttarīti tato brahmakāyikehi uttari, upari parittābhādike sandhāya vadati. Devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvāti ‘‘yathārūpāya maggenāgatāya saddhāya samannāgatā, sīlena sutena cāgena paññāya samannāgatā ito cutā tattha upapannā tā devatā, mayhampi tathārūpā saddhā sīlaṃ sutaṃ cāgo paññā ca saṃvijjatī’’ti devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā sakkhiṃ otārentena viya attano saddhādiguṇā anussaritabbā.
如果经中(《增支部》6.10)如此说到了对两种功德的随念,那又是如何说的呢?他思考这一问题后,说道:“然而在经中……”等。关于这点,虽然经中(《增支部》6.10)确实提到了“自己的,以及那些天神的”两者,似乎二者同等重要,但随后那句“天神的信与戒……”等语,应当将“说”字从后面引来,理解为“应置于见证处”。那么,为何要置于见证处呢?他说:“应知这是为了表明天神与自己有着信等相同的功德。”为何在经中不依文取义,而要如此理解其含义呢?他说:“因为在注释书中……”等。显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ sutte (a. ni. 6.10) ubhayaguṇānussaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ kathanti anuyogaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘sutte panā’’tiādi. Tattha kiñcāpi vuttanti ‘‘attano ca, tāsañca devatāna’’nti ubhayaṃ samadhuraṃ viya sutte (a. ni. 6.10) kiñcāpi vuttaṃ. Atha kho taṃ ‘‘devatānaṃ saddhañca sīlañcā’’tiādivacanaṃ. Sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetabbanti ‘‘vutta’’nti parato padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Kimatthaṃ pana sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapananti āha ‘‘devatānaṃ attano saddhādīhi samānaguṇadīpanatthanti veditabba’’nti. Kasmā pana sutte yathārutavasena atthaṃ aggahetvā evaṃ attho gayhatīti āha ‘‘aṭṭhakathāyañhī’’tiādi.
163 “因此”:因为注释书中将天神置于见证处后,坚固地宣说了对自己功德的随念;正如在戒随念与施随念中那样,于此,对自己功德的随念也是生起禅那的合适之因,故说“因此”。“在前期”:即在修习的初始阶段。“在后期”:即在修习时,如同修习者成就近行禅那样。如果此处只应随念自己的功德,那为何称为“天随念”呢?他说:“这是通过随念与天神功德相似的信等功德(而得名)。”以此表明,这种修习乃由作意相似之处而被称为“天随念”,并非通过随念那些天神本身,亦非随念他们的功德。或者,应知“天随念”这一名称是依前期所发生的对天神功德的随念而得的。正如他接下来将说的:“在前期,依以天神为所缘而生起的心(而得名)。”其余内容容易理解。显示巴利原文
163.Tasmāti yasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā attano guṇānussaraṇaṃ daḷhaṃ katvā vuttaṃ, sīlacāgānussatīsu viya idhāpi attano guṇānussaraṇaṃ jhānuppattinimittaṃ yuttaṃ, tasmā. Pubbabhāge bhāvanārambhe. Aparabhāgeti yathā bhāventassa upacārajjhānaṃ ijjhati, tathā bhāvanākāle. Yadi attano eva idha guṇā anussaritabbā, kathamayaṃ devatānussatīti āha ‘‘devatānaṃ guṇasadisasaddhādiguṇānussaraṇavasenā’’ti. Tena sadisakappanāya ayaṃ bhāvanā ‘‘devatānussatī’’ti vuttā, na devatānaṃ, tāsaṃ guṇānaṃ vā anussaraṇenāti dasseti. Pubbabhāge vā pavattaṃ devatāguṇānussaraṇaṃ upādāya ‘‘devatānussatī’’ti imissā samaññā veditabbā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘pubbabhāge devatā ārabbha pavattacittavasenā’’ti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
杂说之解释显示巴利原文
Pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā
164 “这些”:即这六种随念,如佛随念等。“在详细教导中”:指在详细展开的教导中,这是针对《摩诃男经》(《增支部》6.10; 11.11)而说的。“‘世尊’等词的含义”:即“世尊”等词语的含义。或者,“义乐”是指基于因果而生起的喜悦,“法乐”是指基于因而生起的喜悦。因为,当随念“由远离故,是阿罗汉”时,世尊从烦恼中远离的那个状态即是因。于此,因是能了知者,而非造作者或能获得者。依之而了知的阿罗汉义即是果。依此方法,其余诸词中的因果分别也应知晓。在法随念等中,也通过“由于初、中、后皆善……”等,以及“然而,因为那是正行道……”等,在处处都作了因的指示。“与法相应的”:即与上述因及果所摄的功德相应。“功德”:指自己的功德。显示巴利原文
164.Etāsanti etāsaṃ buddhānussatiādīnaṃ channaṃ anussatīnaṃ. Vitthāradesanāyanti vitthāravasena pavattadesanāyaṃ, mahānāmasuttaṃ (a. ni. 6.10; 11.11) sandhāya vadati. Bhagavātiādīnaṃ atthanti bhagavātiādīnaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ. Atthavedanti vā hetuphalaṃ paṭicca uppannaṃ tuṭṭhimāha. Dhammavedanti hetuṃ paṭicca uppannaṃ tuṭṭhiṃ. ‘‘Ārakattā araha’’nti anussarantassa hi yaṃ taṃ bhagavato kilesehi ārakattaṃ, so hetu. Ñāpako cettha hetu adhippeto, na kārako, sampāpako vā. Yonena ñāyamāno arahattattho, taṃ phalaṃ. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi hetuphalavibhāgo veditabbo. Dhammānussatiādīsupi ‘‘ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇattā’’tiādinā, ‘‘yasmā pana sā sammāpaṭipadā’’tiādinā ca tattha tattha hetuapadeso katoyevāti. Dhammūpasaṃhitanti yathāvuttahetuhetuphalasaṅkhātaguṇūpasaṃhitaṃ. Guṇeti attano guṇe.
165 “唯圣弟子们成就”:应视为对“圣弟子们才成就”这一后分句的强调,此强调是为了显示他们易于成就。因此他说:“因为他们……”等等。凡夫并非完全成就。正如他接下来将说的:“即使如此……”等等。若如此,为何在《摩诃男经》(《增支部》6.10; 11.11)等诸多经典中,要特别提及“圣弟子”呢?诸师长说:因为他们多安住于此。显示巴利原文
165.Ariyasāvakānaññevaijjhantīti ariyasāvakānaṃ ijjhantiyevāti uttarapadāvadhāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, avadhāraṇañca tesaṃ sukhasiddhidassanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ hī’’tiādi. Na puthujjanānaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ ijjhantīti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘evaṃ santepī’’tiādi. Yadi evaṃ , kasmā mahānāmasuttādīsu (a. ni. 6.10; 11.11) bahūsu suttesu ariyasāvakaggahaṇaṃ katanti? Tesaṃ bahulavihāratāyāti ācariyā.
“出离”:即已出、已脱离。“解脱”:即已释放、已解脱。“出起”:即已远离、已出起。所有这些,都是就镇伏而言的。“从贪欲”:即从缠缚中(出离)。“此”:指通过佛随念之力所获得的近行禅。“取为所缘”:即作为条件、作为基础的意思。“净化”:即达到胜义清净。显示巴利原文
Nikkhantanti niggataṃ nissaṭaṃ. Muttanti vissaṭṭhaṃ. Vuṭṭhitanti apetaṃ. Sabbametaṃ vikkhambhanameva sandhāya vadati. Gedhamhāti palibodhato. Idampīti buddhānussativasena laddhaṃ upacārajjhānamāha. Ārammaṇaṃ karitvāti paccayaṃ katvā, pādakaṃ katvāti attho. Visujjhantīti paramatthavisuddhiṃ pāpuṇanti.
“在逼迫中”:即在被渴爱与杂染等所逼迫的、狭隘的家居生活中。“获得空间”:即为证得出世间法而应获得的空间。随念本身即是随念的处所。“清净法”:即具有清净的自性,或堪能清净之法。“由于具有胜义清净的性质”:即因具有证得胜义清净——涅槃的可能性。“通过努力”:即通过精勤。“令遍净”:即令其清净。显示巴利原文
Sambādheti taṇhāsaṃkilesādinā sampīḷe saṃkaṭe gharāvāse. Okāsādhigamo lokuttaradhammassa adhigamāya adhigantabbaokāso. Anussatiyo eva anussatiṭṭhānāni. Visuddhidhammāti visujjhanasabhāvā, visujjhituṃ vā bhabbā. Paramatthavisuddhidhammatāyāti paramatthavisuddhiyā nibbānassa bhabbabhāvena. Upakkamenāti payogena. Pariyodapanāti visodhanā.
166 “即使如此”:意为虽然在《摩诃男经》等众多经典中,这六种随念是专就圣弟子而宣说的。“由彼威力”:即由那种净信心的力量。“获得喜后”:即通过随念的方式,生起以佛为所缘的喜。显示巴利原文
166.Evaṃ santepīti evaṃ mahānāmasuttādīsu anekesu suttesu ariyasāvakasseva vasena chasu anussatīsu desitāsupi. Yassānubhāvenāti yassa cittappasādassa balena. Pītiṃ paṭilabhitvāti anussavavasena buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ uppādetvā.